Programme Structure and

Syllabi for
B. Tech. Mechanical Engineering
(2023 batch onwards)

Department of Mechanical Engineering

Punjab Engineering College
(Deemed to be University) Chandigarh, India

1
 Mechanical Engineering
Semester Scheme B.Tech. 3rd To 8th SEMESTER
2023-24 ONWARDS
Semester I
Course Name Course L T P Credits
Code
Orientation OR2301 - - - 1
Introduction to Mechanical Engineering OR2302 1 0 0 1
Calculus MA2301 3 0 2 4
Applied Chemistry-II CH2302 3 0 2 4
Universal Human Values GS2302 1 0 0 1
Engineering Drawing with CAD software ES2302 2 0 4 4
Skill Development Workshop ES2303 0 0 4 2
Introduction to Product Design ES2307 0 0 4 2
Introduction to Mechatronics ES2304 3 0 2 4
Total 23

Semester II
Course Name Course L T P Credits
Code
Linear Algebra, Differential Equations and Vector MA2302 3 0 2 4
Calculus
Mechanics and Optics PY2302 3 0 2 4
Introduction to Computer Programming ES2301 3 0 2 4
Introduction to Environmental Sciences GS2301 1 0 0 1
Communication Skills HS2351 2 0 2 3
Strength of Materials ES2306 3 0 2 4
Total 20

Semester-III
Course Name Course L T P Credits
Code
Elements of Manufacturing Processes MEN3001 3 0 2 4
Elements of Thermodynamics MEN3002 3 1 0 4
Mechanics of Materials MEN3003 2 1 0 3
Kinematics of Machines MEN3004 2 1 0 3
Physical Metallurgy and Heat Treatment MEN3005 3 0 0 3
Fluid Mechanics MEN3006 2 1/2 2/2 3
Total 20
 Semester-IV
Course Name Course L T P Credits
Code
HSM-II 3
Manufacturing Processes MEN4001 3 0 2 4
Applied Thermodynamics MEN4002 3 0 2 4
Refrigeration and Air Conditioning MEN4003 3 1 0 4
Mechanical Vibrations MEN4004 3 1/2 2/2 4
Dynamics of Machines MEN4005 3 1/2 2/2 4
Total 23
Semester-V
Course Name Course L T P Credits
Code
Production and Operations Management MEN5001 3 0 0 3
Heat and Mass Transfer MEN5002 3 0 2 4
Design of Mechanical Systems MEN5003 3 0 0 3
Mechanical Measurements and Control MEN5004 3 0 0 3
CAD/CAM MEN5005 3 0 0 3
Minor Project MEP5101 0 0 8 4
Total 20
Semester-VI
Course Name Course L T P Credits
Code
Internship Training Part-I MEN6001 0 0 12 6
Internship Training Part-II MEN6002 0 0 4 2
Internship Training Part-III MEN6003 0 0 8 4
Or
Optional Course work
Deptt. Elective Course-V 3 1 0 4
Open Elective MEO1001 3 1 0 4
Project Work MEP6001 0 0 8 4
Total 12

Semester-VII
Course Name Course L T P Credits
Code
HSM-IV 3
Deptt. Elective Course-I 3 1 0 4
Deptt. Elective Course-II 4
Open Elective-I MEO1002 3 1 0 4
Open Elective-II MEO1004 3 0 2 4
Major Project-I MEP7001 0 0 8 4
Total 23
 Semester-VIII
Course Name Course L T P Credits
Code
HSM-III 3
Deptt. Elective Course-III 4
Deptt. Elective Course-IV 4
Open Elective-III MEO1003 3 1 0 4
Proficiency 2
Major Project-II MEP8001 0 0 8 4
Total 21

Minor Specialization in Sustainable Thermal Management

Course Name Course L T P Credits
Code
Design of Thermal Systems MEM1001 3 1 0 4
Thermal System Modelling and Simulation MEM1002 3 1/2 1/2 4
Computational Fluid Dynamics MEM1003 3 0 2 4
Minor Specialization Project-I MEM1004 0 0 6 3
Minor Specialization Project-II MEM1005 0 0 6 3
Total 18

Open Electives to be offered by Mechanical Engineering Department

Course
Course Name L T P Credits
Code
Open Elective Work Station Design MEO1001
3 1 0 4
(6th Semester) and Neuro-Ergonomics
Hydraulic and MEO1002
Open Elective I Pneumatic Control 3 1 0 4
Design
Automotive MEO1004
Open Elective II 3 0 2 4
Engineering
Open Elective III CAD/CAM MEO1003 3 1 0 4
Department Elective I
Course Name Course code L T P Credits
Optimization Techniques in Engineering MEE1001 3 1 0 4
Computer Integrated Design and Manufacturing MEE1002 3 1 0 4
Mechanisms and Machines MEE1003 3 1 0 4
Vibration and Noise Control MEE1004 3 1 0 4
Production Engineering MEE1005 3 1 0 4
Convective Heat and Mass transfer MEE1006 3 1 0 4
Internal Combustion Engines MEE1007 3 1 0 4
Power Plant Engineering MEE1027 3 1 0 4
Department Elective II
Course Name Course code L T P Credits
Total Quality Management MEE1008 3 1 0 4
Fracture mechanics and fatigue MEE1009 3 1 0 4
Modelling and Simulation MEE1010 3 1 0 4
Kinematics and dynamics of robots MEE1011 3 0 2 4
Precision Engineering MEE1012 3 0 2 4
Automotive combustion and emissions MEE1013 3 1 0 4
Computational fluid dynamics MEE1014 3 0 2 4
Industrial Automation MEE1028 3 0 2 4
Department Elective III
Course Name Course code L T P Credits
Finite element method in Engineering MEE1015 3 0 2 4
Hydraulic and Pneumatic Control Design MEE1016 3 1 0 4
Automotive Engineering MEE1017 3 0 2 4
Work Station Design and Neuro-Ergonomics MEE1018 3 1 0 4
Experimental Stress analysis MEE1019 3 1/2 2/2 4
Mechanics of Composites materials MEE1020 3 1 0 4
Production planning and control MEE1021 3 1 0 4
Composite Materials MEE1022 3 0 2 4
Hydraulic Machines MEE1023 3 1/2 2/2 4
Design of Thermal systems MEE1024 3 1 0 4
MEMS and Micro System Design MEE1025 3 1 0 4
Tribology & Lubrication MEE1026 3 1 0 4
Department Elective IV
Course Name Course code L T P Credits
Vehicle Dynamics MEE1029 3 0 2 4
Advanced Manufacturing Techniques MEE1030 3 1 0 4
Surface Engineering MEE1031 3 0 2 4
Product Design and Development MEE1032 3 1 0 4
Two Phase Flow Heat Transfer MEE1033 3 1 0 4
Thermal System Modelling and Simulation MEE1034 3 1/2 2/2 4
Non-Conventional Energy Resources MEE1035 3 1 0 4
Experimental Methods for Engineers MEE1036 3 1 0 4
Micro-nano Scale Heat Transfer MEE1037 3 0 2 4

Department Elective V
Course Name Course code L T P Credits
Principles of Product Design MEE1038 3 1 0 4
Industrial Engineering and management MEE1039 3 1 0 4
Reliability and Maintenance Engineering MEE1040 3 1 0 4
Operation Research and Simulation Techniques MEE1041 3 1 0 4
 NAME OF DEPTT : Department of Chemistry
Course name : Applied Chemistry I (CSE, ECE, EE, DS, VLSI, AI)
Course Code : CH2301
Year : 23-24 (2nd semester)
Credits : 4
LTP : 302 Total No. of Lecture-42

Objective: To teach the fundamentals and applications of Chemical Sciences essential for the
development of electrical and electronic materials and technologies. Students will be learning
various analytical techniques for the characterizations of electronic organic/inorganic
materials.

Lecture wise breakup No. of Lectures = 42

1 Fundamentals for Applied Chemistry (10)

Molecular orbital theory, Jahn-Teller Effect in Crystal Field Theory, Solid state
chemistry: Crystal defects and line imperfections, Reaction mechanism in organic
chemistry: Principles and methods of determination, Chemical Kinetics:
Langmuir–Hinselwood Mechanism, acid-base equilibria in non aqueous media,
Introduction to Computational chemistry and open source softwares
2 Polymeric Materials (6)
Mechanism and methods of polymerization, structure-activity relationship,
Conducting Polymers: types (n- or p- doping) and applications, Polymeric fibre
materials
3 Spectroscopic Methods for structural Analysis: Principle and applications (UV, (9)
IR, NMR, SEM and TEM)
4 Energy Storage and Sensing Devices: Fundamentals of Electrochemistry, types (8)
of electrodes, Reference electrodes, Ion-selective electrodes, Fuel cells, Batteries
(Lithium-ion Batteries and EV Batteries), Renewable energy (Artificial
photosynthesis), Solar cells, Sensors for IoT
5 Chemistry of Electronic and Electrical Materials (9)
Semi-conductor and super conducting Materials, Carbon materials, Optical
Materials (OLED), 2D Materials, Magnetic materials.

Outcomes: 1. To be able to apply the fundamentals of chemistry towards developing new

Technologies based on new materials.
2. To attain the essential analytical skills and designing of materials for electrical and
electronic applications.
3. Application of software as important tools in technological applications.
Books:
1. Concise Inorganic Chemistry, by J. D. Lee, 5th Edition, 2003 (Chapman & Hall).
2. Organic Chemistry by S. M. Mukherji, and S. P. Singh, 2017 (Newagepublishers).
3. Principles of Physical Chemistry by Puri, Sharma and Pathania, 2008 (W.H.
Freeman& Co).
4. Atkin’s Physical Chemistry by Peter Atkins, Julio de Paula, 7th Edition (Oxford
University Press).
5. Principle of Polymerization by G. Odian, 4th Edition, (John Wiley & Sons, Inc.).
6. D. S. Pavia, G.M. Lasmpman and G.S. Kriz: Introduction to Spectroscopy, 4th
Edition,(Thomson learning, Indian Edition).
7. Computational chemistry: Introduction to theory and applications of molecular
andquantum mechanics: Lewars Errol G. (Springer)
8. NPTEL web lectures: Chemistry of Materials, Engineering Chemistry I & III.
Practicals

Sr. No. Name of Experiment

1. To find the strength of the given sodium hydroxide solution by titrating it against standard solution
of hydrochloric acid using pH meter.

2. To determine the ferrous content in the supplied sample of iron ore by titrimetic analysis against
standard K2Cr2O7 solution using potassium ferricyanide [K3Fe(CN)6] as external indicator.

3. To find the strength of Sodium hydroxide (NaOH) solution by titrating it against 0.1 N
hydrochloric acid conductometrically.

4. Determination of reaction rate constant of acid catalyzed Hydrolysis of Ester.

5. Verify Beer-Lambert’s law for KMnO4 colorimetrically.

6. Synthesis of Polyaniline based conducting polymer.

7. To determine the value of rate constant (k) for the inversion of sucrose by polarimeter.

8. To prepare nickel dimethyl glyoxime complex, [Ni(DMG)2]. Illustrate the structure of the complex
using FTIR.

9. Synthesis of iron oxide nanoparticles and characterization using FTIR.

10. Predicting the best Molecular docking conformations of a protein with the help of Swiss Dock.
 NAME OF DEPTT. : Department of Chemistry
Course name : Applied Chemistry II (Mech.,Prod.,Metta,Aero.,Civil Engg.)
Course Code : CH2302
Year : 23-24 (1st semester)
Credits : 4
LTP : 302 Total No. of Lecture-42
Objective: To teach the fundamentals and applications of Chemical Sciences essential for
the development of engineering materials and processing technologies. Students will be
learning various analytical techniques for the characterizations of composites and hybrid
materials.

Lecture wise breakup No. of Lectures = 42

1 Fundamentals for Applied Chemistry (8)

Molecular orbital theory, Jahn-Teller Effect in Crystal Field Theory, Solid state
chemistry: Crystal defects and line imperfections , Reaction mechanism in organic
chemistry: Principles and methods of determination, Chemical Kinetics: Langmuir
–Hinshelwood Mechanism, Acid -base equilibria in non aqueous media
2 Polymer Chemistry (5)
Mechanism and methods of polymerization, Structure-Activity relationship, High
performance polymers and applications, Natural and synthetic fibers,
biodegradable polymers
3 Fuels and Catalysis (5)
Petroleum processing, Solid and liquid Fuels for Propellants, Chemistry of
combustion and equations, Catalytic convertors
4 Electrochemistry and Corrosion: Introduction to Electrochemistry, Fuel cells, (7)
Batteries (Lithium-ion Batteries and EV Batteries), Corrosion control and
protective coatings
5 Spectroscopic Methods for structural analysis: Principle and Applications (10)
(UV, IR, NMR, AAS/ICP-AES, SEM, TEM, XRD).
6 Chemistry of Engineering Materials (7)
Ceramic and Cement Materials, Metals and Alloys ,Phase change materials, Bio-
inspired materials, Composite materials, Smart materials: Chemical compositions
and its applications

Outcomes:
1. To be able to apply the fundamentals of chemistry towards emerging materials to benefit
the societal needs.
2. To attain the essential analytical skills and designing of materials for various applications.
3. To be able to identify the chemical compositions required for designing of high
performance materials.

Books:
1. Concise Inorganic Chemistry, by J. D. Lee, 5th Edition, 2003 (Chapman & Hall).
2. Organic Chemistry by S. M. Mukherji, and S. P. Singh, 2017 (Newagepublishers).
3. Principles of Physical Chemistry by Puri, Sharma and Pathania, 2008 (W.H.
Freeman & Co).
4. Atkin’s Physical Chemistry by Peter Atkins, Julio de Paula, 7th Edition (Oxford
University Press).
 5. Principle of Polymerization by G. Odian, 4th Edition, (John Wiley & Sons, Inc.).
6. D. S. Pavia, G.M. Lasmpman and G.S. Kriz: Introduction to Spectroscopy, 4th
Edition, (Thomson learning, Indian Edition).
7. NPTEL web lectures: Chemistry of Materials, Engineering Chemistry I & III.

Practicals
Sr. Name of Experiment
No.

1. Measurement of acid base equilibria by pH meter in water sample.

2. To determine the ferrous content in the supplied sample of iron ore by titrimetric
analysis against standard K2Cr2O7 solution using potassium ferricyanide
[K3Fe(CN)6] as external indicator.
3. Synthesis of polyaniline based conducting polymer.

4. To find the strength of given NaOH solution by titrating it against 0.05 N

Hydrochloric acid solution using a conductivity meter.
5. Synthesis of iron oxide nanoparticles and characterization using various
techniques ( UV/ FTIR/ SEM/XRD).
6. To determine the value of rate constant (k) for the inversion of sucrose by
polarimeter.
7. To verify Lambert Beer’s law for KMnO4 using UV-Visible Spectrophotometer.
8. To determine the percentage of Cu in the copper alloy solution provided 0.1 N
hypo solution.
9. To prepare nickel dimethyl glyoxime complex, [Ni(DMG)2]. Illustrate the
structure of compound using FTIR.
10. Determination of reaction rate constant of acid catalyzed hydrolysis of ester.
Course Name : Introduction to Computer Programming
Course Code : ES 2301
Credits : 4
LTP : 302

Course Objectives:
 To develop logical skills so that students should be able to solve basic programming
problems
 To use programming knowledge to develop small projects including basic GUI design

Total No. of Lectures: 42

Lecture wise Breakup No. of
Lectures
Unit 1 INTRODUCTION TO PROGRAMMING 3
Evolution of languages: Machine languages, Assembly
languages, High-level languages. Software requirements for
programming: System softwares like operating system, compiler,
linker, loader; Application softwares like editor. Flowcharts.
Algorithm, specification of algorithm.
Industrial uses of programming in various domains
Unit 2 DATA TYPES and OPERATORS AND EXPRESSION 7
Storing integers, numbers with decimals, characters and strings,
typecasting. User input and output, use of command line
arguments
Operators: arithmetic operators, relational operators, logical
operators, bitwise operators, miscellaneous operators.
Expressions and their evaluation. Precedence and associativity
rules.
Unit 3 ITERABLE CONTAINERS and STATEMENTS 7
List, set, tuple and dictionaries; range function; difference
between various iterable containers Decision making statements:
if, if-else, nested if and if-else. Control statements: for & while
loops, nested loops; Role of statements like break, continue
Unit 4 FUNCTIONS and CLASSES 8
Advantage of modularizing program into functions, function
definition and function invocation. Function arguments: default,
keyword and positional arguments.
Scope and lifetime of a variable. Recurrence relations and
Recursion
Advantage of using classes, defining class data members &
functions and accessing using objects. Constructors and
destructors in a class, parameterized constructors.
1/3
 Unit 5 GUI design 5
Introduction to tkinter library, use of TK & mainloop methods,
use of widgets like Button, Canvas, Checkbutton, Entry, Frame,
MenuButton, Listbox, Menu, Scrollbar, Text, Message, Pack,
Grid, place etc. for GUI design.
Unit 6 SORTING AND SEARCHING 9
Searching: Linear search, binary search and hash search.
Sorting: Insertion sort, selection sort, bubble sort, quick sort,
merge sort, heap sort, and Bucket sort.
Time and space complexity of algorithms, comparing algorithms
Unit 7 Problem Solving 3
Real-world programming problems

Total No. of Turns: 14

List of Experiments Number of
Turns
1 Implement programs to input/output various data types 2
2 Implement programs to use command line arguments and operators 2
3 Implement programs making use of conditional statements and loops 2
4 Implement programs making use of iterable containers 2
5 Implement programs making use of functions and recursion 2
6 Implement various searching and sorting algorithms 2
7 Project work including GUI design using tkinter 2

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, students will be able to:
1 Develop understanding of the fundamental concepts essential for programming.
2 Make efficient use of iterables, function and classes to programming problems
3 Develop simple GUI applications
4 Learn to compare algorithms and improve efficiency of algorithms

Text Book:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
1. Python Programming: An Introduction to Computer Science by John Latest
M. Zelle, Franklin, Beedle& Associates Inc Edition
Reference Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
1. Think Python, How to Think Like a Computer Scientist, Version Latest
2.0.17, Allen Downey Green Tea Press Needham, Massachusetts Edition
2. Core python programming, Dr. R. Nageswara Rao, 2nd edition, Latest
2/3
 Dreamtech press Edition

Equivalent MOOCs courses:

Sr. Offered by
Course Links
No.
1. Programming, Data Structures and Algorithms using Python, NPTEL
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106106145
2. Programming in Python, Swayam
https://onlinecourses.swayam2.ac.in/cec22_cs20/preview

Mapping of Course Outcomes (COs) with Program Outcomes (POs) and Program Specific
Outcomes (PSOs):
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2 3
CO1 3 1 2 1 3 1 - 1 - 1 - 1 2 - -
CO2 3 2 2 2 3 1 - 1 - 1 - 1 2 - -
CO3 3 2 3 1 3 1 - 1 1 1 1 - 1 - -
CO4 3 2 2 3 2 1 - 1 - - - 1 1 - -
1: Low, 2: Medium, 3: High

3/3
 Course Name Strength of Materials
Course Code ES2306
Credits 4
L TP 3-0-2

Course Objectives:
At the end of this course, the student should be able to understand the basic concept regarding the strength of
material. The course will prepare the students to apply these concepts to engineering and applied sciences
problems.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
INTRODUCTION:
Equations of static equilibrium, Concept of various forces/loads, stresses and strains
1 developed due to these forces/loads, Uniaxial tensile test, Stress-strain diagrams for
4
various types of ferrous and non-ferrous materials, isotropic and anisotropic materials,
Compression test, impact test, fatigue test, hardness test, torsion and bending test as per
ASTM standards
SIMPLE STRESS & STRAIN:
Hooke’s law, stress and elongation produced in various types of bars due to its own weight
2 and applied axial force, Poisson’s ratio, and relationship between elastic constants,stresses 6
and elongation produced in simple & composite bars due to axial, thermal and
combined loading.
2-D STATE OF STRESS ANALYSIS:
Generalized 2-D state of stress accompanied by shear stress, stresses on an arbitrary plane
3 under this state of stress, sign conventions for normal and shear stresses, complementary 6
shear stress, principal stresses and principal planes, Different stresses determination
through Mohr’s stress circle approach in 2-D generalized state of stress.
SHEAR FORCE AND BENDING MOMENT IN BEAMS:
Classification of beams, supports and loads, Shear force (SF) & Bending moment (BM)
4 in beams and their sign conventions, Relation between rate of loading (w) with SF and
6
BM. SF and BM diagrams of cantilevers, simply sported beams with or without overhang
under different types of loading e.g. concentrate loads, uniformly distributed load,
uniformly varying load, moment or its combinations, the point of contra-flexure
BENDING & SHEAR STRESSES IN BEAMS:
Theory of pure bending, position of neutral axis, Bending equation, practical application
5 of bending equation, review of moment of area concepts, variation of bending stress in 6
various cross-sectional beams, shear stresses in beams, variation of shear stresses for
different cross-sectional beams
TORSION OF CIRCULAR SHAFTS:
Torsional equation of circular shafts, shear stress distribution, torsional rigidity, power
6 transmitted by the shaft, comparisons of hollow & solid circular shafts, analysis of shafts 5
in series and parallel mode, Equivalent bending moment and equivalent torque for a shaft
subjected to bending moment and torque simultaneously
COLUMN AND STRUTS: Definitions, Euler’s theory of columns buckling, Euler’s
7 4
equation for various end restraints, Rankine and other empirical formulae.
DEFLECTION OF BEAMS: Relationship between bending moment, slope and
8 deflection, moment area method, method of integration, Macaulay’s method, Use of these
5
methods to determine slope and deflection for statically determinate and statically
indeterminate beams under various loading conditions.
Sr. No. List of Experiments No. of
Turns
To perform uni-axial Tensile Test on a given material and to determine its 2
1
various mechanical properties under the uni-axial tensile loading.
To perform uni-axial compressive test on a given material and to determine its 2
2
various mechanical properties under the uni-axial compression loading.
3 To perform shear test on a given material and to determine its shear stress of the 2
material.
To perform torsion test on a given material and to determine its various 2
4
mechanical properties under torsional load.
To perform Column test of a given material and to determine its Euler’s buckling load 2
5
and Young’s modulus of elasticity of the material.
6 To perform Impact test on a given material and to determine its resilience. 2
To perform a test on close and open coil springs under axial loading on spring tester 2
7
and determine its various mechanical properties.
To study and perform Fatigue test on a given material and to determine endurance 2
8
strength and limit of the material.
9 To determine various Rockwell hardness of the given materials 2
To perform the Three point bending test on a given material and determine its 2
10
Young’s modulus of elasticity and bending strength.
11 To study the concepts of various strain gauges along with their areas of applications 2
12 To study the Creep test on the given material specimen and determine its creep 2
strength.
To perform the various tests on the given wooden specimens by wood UTM and 2
13
determineits various strengths.
To perform test on strain hardened specimen and to determine its effect on the 2
14
Young’smodulus of elasticity.

Course Outcomes: By the end of this course, the student will be able to:
Understand the concept of stresses & strains, various types of materials, its properties & testing
1
processes as per ASTM standards.
Understand elastic constants and also be able to determine stresses & elongations in simple and
2
composite bars under various types of loads.
Determine stresses on an arbitrary plane for a generalized 2-D state of stress accompanied by shear
3
stressthrough analytical and graphical methods
Understand and be able draw shear force and bending moment diagrams for different types of
4
beams under various types of loading.
Understand bending and shear stress equations and its application in determination of bending &
5
shear stresses in different cross-sectional beams at any point across its length.
Understand the torsional stresses for solid, hollow and composite circular shafts and its importance
6
inpower transmission.
7 Understand the Column and struts and determine the buckling load under various axial loadings.
8 Determine the deflections of various beams subjected to different loading by various methods.

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
1 Strength of Material - G. H. Ryder (MacMillan) 1969
2 An Introduction to the Mechanics of Solids – Crandall & Dahl (Mc-Graw Hill) 2012
3 Engg. Mechanics of Solids - E. P. Popav (Pearson Education) 2003
4 Strength of Material - D S Bedi, Fifth Ed. 2010
5 Strength of Material - R K Rajput, Fifth Ed. 2012
Course Name Engineering Drawing with CAD Software
Course Code ES2302
Credits 3
L TP 2-0-2
Course Objectives:
At the end of this course, the student should be able to understand the basic concepts of Engineering Drawing.
The student should be able to visualize and draw the two- and three-dimensional objects. The student should
also be able to understand the features associated with operations of the computer-aided design (CAD)
software.
Total No. of Lectures – 28
Number of
Lecture wise breakup Lectures
Introduction to Engineering Graphics, Concept of points and lines, System of
1 4
Projections, Orthographic projections, Dimensioning.
Introduction to different types of CAD Softwares e.g. SolidWorks/AutoCAD/
2 CATIA etc., 2D-Sketching, Sketching Entities & Relation, 3D-Sketching, Editing 7
and its Features, Dimensions, Sketch Tools, File handling.

3 Projections of planes / lamina on reference planes, classification of primary and

5
secondary planes, use of auxiliary planes, Exercises using CAD software.

4 Classification of solids, Projections of solids on the basis of positions of the axis of

6
various solids on reference planes and Sectioning of solids, Exercises using CAD
software.

5 Introduction to Perspective projection, isometric views, Isometric lines & Axes,

6
conversion of orthographic views to isometric views and vice-versa, Exercises using
CAD software.

Number of
List of Experiments: Turns
Exercises to be done using CAD software
1 2D & 3D Sketching using various sketching tools. 2
2 Projection of planes. 2
3 Developments of 3D-parts. 2
4 Projection of solids. 2
5 Projection of Sectioning of solids. 2
6 Isometric and orthographic views. 2
7 Generating drawings of 3D-parts. 2

Sr. Course outcome Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the students will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Understand the basic concepts of Engineering Graphics, drawing standards, L2
conventions and symbols that are in common usage.
2 Apply the concepts of engineering drawing to create orthographic projections of L3 & L6
points, lines, planes, solids with conventional and CAD software.
3 Visualize the actual objects and convert them in to readable drawings with L6
conventional and CAD software.
4 Create new designs/engineering models with conventional and CAD software. L6
CO-PO & PSO Course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO2 3 2 3 3 3 - - - 1 - - 1 3 2
CO3 3 2 3 3 3 - - - 1 - - 1 3 2
CO4 3 2 3 3 3 - - - 1 - - 1 3 2

Suggested Books:
Sr. Year of Publication/
No. Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Reprint
1 Engineering Drawing, P. S. Gill, S.K. Kataria& Sons. 2012
2 Engineering Drawing, D.A. Jolhe, Tata McGraw Hill 2010
3 Engineering Graphics with SOLIDWORKS, David C. Plan chard, SDC 2020
Publications
Course Name : Introduction to Mechatronics
Course Code : ES 2304
Credits : 04
L T P : 3-0-2
Course Objectives:
The objective of the course content is to:
1.Impart knowledge and information about mechatronics system.
2. Understand the concepts of signal conditioning and data acquisition for intelligent systems.
3.Develop the basics for mechatronic product design
Total No. of Lectures-42

Introduction to Mechatronics : Introduction, Elements of Mechatronics system, Classificationof

Mechatronics system,Mechatronic system intelligence, Components involved in intelligent system
designand development,measurementsand control system as a part of mechatronics system,Application of
Mechatronic systems(6)

Sensors and transducers : Introduction,Performance characteristics of transducers, Transducer for

displacement (Potentiometer, strain-gauge, Optical encoder, LVDT, Hall effect sensor);
velocity(Tachogenerator), force (load cell), pressure (Piezoelectric sensors, Tactile sensor), liquid level (
Floats, Differential pressure), Temperature (Bimetallic strips, RTDs, Thermistors, Thermocouples) and
light sensor (Photovoltaic- transducer, LDR, Photodiode, Photo Transistor). (8)

Signal conditioning: Operational amplifier (Inverting, Non-inverting, Summing, Integrating, Differential

amplifiers, comparator), protection, filtering, digital signals (R-2R ladder DAC and Successive
Approximation ADC), Concepts of multiplexers(7)

Controllers:Basics of number system, binary, octal and hexadecimal systems with their conversion from
one system to other. Boolean algebra, logic gates, ICs, flip-flops& counters.Microprocessor,
Microcontroller, PLC & their Architectures, Working Principle, Software Programs (Assembly/High
Level), Interfacing Aspects (7)

Actuators and mechanisms:

Pneumatic and hydraulic actuation systems: Directional control valves, Pressure control valves,
cylindersMechanical actuation systems: Kinematic chain, cam, gear, clutches, ratchet and pawl, belt and
chain drive, bearings
Electrical actuation systems:Relays, Solid-state Switches (Diode, Thyristor, Triac, BJT, FET), DC and
AC motors, brushless dc motor, stepper motors, servomotors (8)

Robotics:Types of motions, Function, Governing Laws, Classification, Features and Components of

Robots, System Automation(6)

Topics to be thought through Flipped Learning (NPTEL MOOCs) -

https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112107298)
Mechanical actuation systems: Kinematic chain, cam, gear, ratchet and pawl, belt and chain drive,
bearings (Unit 3 Lecture 11)
Pneumatic and hydraulic actuation systems: Directional control valves, Pressure control valves, cylinders
(Unit 3 Lecture 12)
Basics of number, binary, octal and hexadecimal systems with their conversion from one system to other.
Boolean algebra, logic gates, ICs, flip-flops. (Unit 5 Lecture 21&22)
PLC Controller (Unit 7 Lecture 33)
 LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1 Experiment on Sensors & Transducers Number of Turns
To study the characteristics of LVDT using linear displacement trainer kit &
(i) 01
compare with ideal characteristics.
To measure the strain of the metal strip using strain gauge trainer kit & compare with
(ii) 01
ideal characteristics.
To measure the angular displacement of resistive & capacitive transducer using
(iii) 01
angular displacement trainer kit & compare with ideal characteristics.
To obtain the characteristics of RTD, thermistor, thermocouple with hot and cold
(iv) 01
junction thermal trainer kit & compare with ideal characteristics.
2. Experiments on Signal Conditioning.
(a) Experiments on Analog Devices
(i) PN Junction Diode 01
(ii) Zener Diode 01
(iii) Half wave rectifier 01
(iv) Full wave rectifier 01
(b) Experiments on Digital devices
(i) Logic Gates (AND, OR, NAND, NOR etc) 01
(ii) Flip Flop - RS Flip Flop, JK Flip Flop, T Flip Flop and D Flip Flop. 01
3 Experiments on Controller
(i) To perform the basic sequence programming using PLC. 01
4. Experiments on Actuators
(i) To perform AND and OR logic using pneumatic actuators. 01

5. Project using Arduino

(i) To build a line follower robot using Arduino. 02

Course Outcomes:
By the end of this course, the student will be able:
CO1: To understand the basic concepts, applications and components of mechatronic system.
CO2: To analyze sensing, signal conditioning and data acquisition circuits.
CO3: To design product and systems theoretically as well as practically with Intelligence.
CO4: To apply the knowledge of mechatronic system for industrial applications.

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr. No. Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
Reprint
1 Mechatronics by W Bolton , 6thedition, Pearson Education 2019
2 Mechatronics by Tilak Thakur 1st edition, Oxford University Press 2016
3 Mechatronics by Dan Necsulescu, Pearson Education 2001
4 Mechatronics by H M T Limited,TMH 2017
5 Mechatronics Principles, Concepts & Applications by Nitaigour P Mahalik, TMH 2017
 Course Name Introduction To Electronics & Electrical Engineering
Course Code ES 2305
Credits 4
LTP 3-0-2

Course Objectives:
To introduce to the students, the fundamental concepts of electronic devices, circuits and
electrical systems for engineering applications.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
1 Semiconductor Devices and applications: Introduction to different 10
semiconductor materials, familiarization with active and passive components,
operation of p-n junction diode, applications of diodes, introduction to BJT and
MOSFET, transistor as an amplifier, transistor as a switch, functional operation
of OpAmp, concept of Oscillators, filters and their types
2 Digital Electronics: Number system, Binary arithmetic, Binary codes, 9
introduction to logic gates, combinational circuits: adder, subtractor,
multiplexer, demultiplexer, sequential circuit: flipflops.
3 Communication Systems: Basics of signals and systems, time and frequency 10
domain analysis, various frequency bands used for communication, block
diagram of Analog and Digital communication, need of modulation,
Introduction to wired and wireless communication.
4 Fundamentals of Electrical Engineering: Introduction to circuit laws, amplitude, 7
phase, phase difference, RMS value and average value of an AC signal,
introduction and types of motors, Transformer: construction, working principle
and applications
5 Microprocessor and Microcontroller: Introduction to microprocessor and 6
microcontroller, architecture of 8086, functional diagram, register organization,
memory segmentation

List of Experiments

S. Name of the experiment No. of

No. turns
1 To familiarise with basic electronic components, oscilloscopes, power supply, 2
multimeter etc.
2 To simulate and analyse the IV characteristics of PN junction diode 1
3 To simulate and analyse the functionality of opamp 2
4 To simulate and verify the truth tables of various logic gates 1
5 To simulate and analyse various combinational circuits 2
6 To simulate and verify the truth tables of various flip-flops 2
7 To familiarise with microprocessor and microcontroller kits 2
8 Write a MATLAB program for the generation of standard signals 1
9 To implement amplitude modulation and demodulation by using MATLAB 1

Course Outcomes: By the end of this course, the students will be able to
1 Express the understanding of semiconductor devices (p-n Diode, BJT, MOSFET etc), and their
applications.
2 Demonstrate the functional operation of various analog and digital electronic circuits.
3 Solve basic electronic circuits using circuit laws.
4 Describe various signals, systems and fundamentals of communication systems.
5 Describe the basic principle and working of fundamental electrical systems, ac dc motors and
transformer etc.
6 Explain the fundamentals of microprocessors and microcontrollers.

Suggested Books:
S. Name of Book/ Authors/ Publishers Year of Publication/
No. Reprint
1 Electronics Devices & Circuit Theory, RL Boylestead & L Nashelsky 2009
(PHI)
2 Circuits and Networks: Analysis and Synthesis, Sudhakar and Shyam 2009
Mohan, TMH
3 Electronic Communication Systems by G. Kennedy, Mc Graw Hill, 4th 2008
Edition
4 Digital Principles and Applications, 7th Edition, A. Malvino and D. 2011
Leach
5 Alexander, Charles K., and Sadiku, Matthew N. O., Fundamentals of 2013
Electric Circuits, 5th Ed, McGraw Hill
6 A course in Electrical and Electronic Measurements and 2001
Instrumentation, A K. Sawhney, 18th Edition, Dhanpat Rai & Sons
7 Microprocessors and Microcontrollers Architecture, Programming 2017
and Interfacing Using 8085, 8086 and 8051, Soumitra Mandal, Tata
McGraw-Hill
 Course Name : Introduction to Product Design
Course Code : ES -2307
Credits : 2
LTP : 0-0-4

Course Objectives:
To demonstrate the concepts Product Design and Development skills through: Additive
Manufacturing, Reverse Engineering, CNC machining, Laser engraving and Robotic

Course Outcomes:
Apply the fundamental concepts and principles of reverse engineering in product design
1
and development.
Understand the processand applications of Additive Manufacturing for Product
2
development
3 Understand the concepts and applications of CNC machines&Robot and its interface.

Practical’s Total: 56 hours

Sr. No. Name No of turns

1 Prepare a CAD model of given Product using NX Software 4X2

2 Reverse Engineering (3D Scanning, Repair and measurement) of 4X2

given product for development of CAD model
3 Converting CT/MRI scan data using MIMICS Software to Develop 4X1
the CAD model
4 Tessellation of various CAD models into STL file and Simulation of 4X1
process parameters using software and its validation
5 Fabrication of CAD model using polymers based 3D Printer for 4X1
Product development
6 To study various CNC machine codes and addresses and write a 4X1
programme for a given profile
7 To execute the part program on CNC trainer kit followed by product 4X1
fabrication on CNC machine tool
8 Demonstrate the various components of industrial robots 4X1
andprogramming the Robot for pick and place application
9 To design a circuit using the PLC concept for automated devices 4X1

10 To sketching given design using CorelDRAW and fabricate the 4X1

product using Laser engraving
11 To measure the surface integrity of given Product using advance 4X2
measurement techniques
Course Name : Introduction to Environmental Sciences
Course Code : GS 2301 (Common to all branches)
Credits : 1
LTP : 100

Course Objectives:
This course aims to (i) acquaint the students with the basics of Environmental Science (ii) make
them aware of the importance of Environmental Science

Total No. of Lectures – 14

Lecture-wise breakup No. of
Lectures
Multi-disciplinary Nature of Environmental Studies; Environmental 2
Unit 1 Problems and their Causes, Concept of Sustainability; Sustainable
Development, Sustainable Development Goals (SDG).
Types of Ecosystems - System Dynamics - Understanding Ecosystems, 2
Unit 2
Ecosystem Degradation, Ecosystem Delivery, Habitat Classification.
Natural Resources and Associated Problems, Non Renewable Resources, 2
Unit 3
Renewable Resources, Resource Utilization.
Energy and Environment – Fossil Fuel, Geothermal, Tidal, Nuclear, Solar, 2
Unit 4
Wind, Hydropower and Biomass.
Environmental Pollution – Air Pollution, Water Pollution, Soil Pollution, 2
Unit 5 Marine Pollution, Noise Pollution, Thermal Pollution, Nuclear Hazards ;
Global Environmental Issues ; Solutions to Pollution Problems.
Cleaner Production and Life Cycle Analysis - LCA Methodology, Steps 2
Unit 6
and Tools; EIA and Environment Audit.
Environment, Development and Society- Emerging Technologies for 2
Unit 7 Sustainable Development and Environmental Management; Policies and
Practices, Legislation; Disaster Management.

Course Outcomes (COs):

At the end of the course, the students will be able to:
1 Relate the importance of environmental science for sustainable development of
society.
2 Apply the principles of environmental science and the concept of sustainable
development in real life engineering problems.

Test Books Year of

Publication/
Reprint
S.No. Name of Book
1 “Environmental Science”, Miller G.T. and Spool, Ceonage Learning 2021
Publications.
2 “Environmental Studies”, Banny Joseph, Tata Mcgraw Hill Publication. 2021
3 “Text book of Environmental Studies for U.G. Courses”, Erach Bharucna 2021
, University Press.
4 “Environmental Studies – from criteria to cure”, R. Raogopalan, Oxford 2022
Univ. Press.
5 “Principles of Environmental Science – Inquiry and applications”, Mary 2020
Ann Cunningham, William P. Cunningham, TMH Edition.

1
Course Name Universal Human Values
Couse Code GS2302
Credits 1
LTP 1-0-0

Objectives:
The course has the following objectives-
CO1-To equip students with foundation in ethical decision-making, teamwork, and social
responsibility.
CO2-To emphasize the integration of technical skills with ethical principles to prepare
students for responsible and ethical professional practices.
CO3-To shape students into well-rounded individuals with strong ethical foundation that
guides their actions, decision and interactions with world around them.

Total Number of Lectures: 14

Lecture wise Breakup Number

of
Lectures
Course Introduction: Need, Basic Guidelines, Content & Process for 2
Value Education
Understanding ethics, morals, and values
Ethical theories and their application in engineering and technology
Ethical Decision-Making 3
Steps in ethical decision-making
Identifying and analysing ethical dilemmas in real-world scenarios
Teamwork and Collaboration 3
Characteristics of effective teams
Conflict resolution and managing differences
Collaboration tools and techniques for virtual teams
Social Responsibility and Sustainability 3
Role of engineers in promoting social good
Environmental ethics and sustainable development
Corporate social responsibility and ethical considerations in technology
choices
Ethical analysis of Technological Innovations 3
Engineering Ethics
Balancing short-term gains with long-term consequences
Course Outcomes:
Some of the key outcomes that students can expect after completing this course:
CO1-Increased awareness of ethical issues in both personal and professional contexts.
CO2-Encourages critical thinking skills, allowing students to analyse complex situations
from multiple angles and evaluate the ethical implications of different actions.
CO3-Promotes an understanding of diverse cultures, beliefs, and backgrounds, fostering an
inclusive mindset.
CO4-Engage in self-reflection and introspection, leading to personal growth and a better
understanding of their own values, strengths, and areas for improvement.

Suggested Books:
Year of
S.No. Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
Reprint
“Engineering Ethics” (Includes Human Values), Govindarajan M,
1 2017
Pearson Education Inc.
“Professional Ethics and Human Values”, Govindarajan M,
2 2020
Learning India Private Limited.
“Professional Ethics and Human Values (JNTU-Kakinada)", B
3 2021
Raghavan, McGraw Hill.
"The Moral Status of Technical Artefacts (Philosophy of
4 2020
Engineering and Technology)", Peter Kroes and Peter-Paul Verbeek
“Ethics and Professionalism in Engineering (Broadview Guides to
5 Business and Professional Ethics)" by Richard H McCuen and 2020
Kristin L Gilroy., Pubs: W.W. Norton & Company.
“Engineering Ethics: Challenges and Opportunities" by W Richard
6 2019
Bowen, Cengage Learning

Additional Reading-
Year of
S.No. Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
Reprint
A Casebook in Interprofessional Ethics: A Succinct Introduction to
1 Ethics for the Health Professions (SpringerBriefs in Ethics)", 2020
Jeffrey P Spike and Rebecca Lunstroth,2 Pearson Education Inc
“Fundamentals of Ethics for Scientists and Engineers", Edmund G
2 Seebauer and Robert L Barry,2020, Pearson Education Inc. 2020
.
 SYLLABUS
Course Name : Communication Skills
Course Code : HS2351
Credits : 3
LTP : 2-0-2

Course Objectives
The objective of the course content is:
CO1: To explain different aspects of communication process and enable the students to develop a
strong theoretical base to handle various real-life communication tasks.
CO2: To provide opportunities to the students to acquire and practice their LSRW skills in
English for effective communication in professional life.
CO3: To enable the students to articulate their ideas and perspectives using appropriate
communication strategies and tools.
CO4: To develop critical thinking and creative writing skills among the students and equip them
with necessary analytical tools to achieve success in personal and professional domains.

Total No. of Lectures – 28

No. of
Lecture-wise Breakup
Lectures
Introduction to Communication (4)
1 Concept, Process, Modes – verbal (oral and written) and non-verbal (kinesics,
proxemics, chronemics), Types (formal, semi-formal, and informal), Channels
(downward, upward, horizontal, diagonal), and Levels (extrapersonal,
interpersonal, intrapersonal, organizational, and mass) of Communication,
Barriers to Effective Communication with Solutions, Significance and Tools of
Effective Communication.
Developing Effective Listening and Speaking Skills (7)
2 Hearing versus Listening, Listening Process (hearing, understanding,
remembering, evaluating and responding), Note-taking, Barriers to Listening,
and Strategies for Effective Listening.
Tools and Techniques (linguisticand paralinguistic) of Effective Speaking at
Various Levels (interpersonal, group, organization and society), Art of
Conversation, Dialogue, Discussion, Public Speaking, Presentation, Negotiation,
and Persuasion.
Developing Reading and Technical Writing Skills (8)
3 Concept, Strategies and Techniques (skimming, scanning, inferring, close
reading) for Effective Reading and Comprehension, Understanding and
Summarizing the Gist.
Tips for Effective Technical Writing, Formal Letter Writing, Notice, E-mail
Writing, Precis Writing, Statement of Purpose, and IMRD-Based Report.
 Critical and Creative Thinking Skills (4)
4 Descriptive, Referential, Inferential, Discursive, Analytical, Evaluative, Creative
and Lateral Using Texts and Various Media Forms like Books, Newspaper
Articles, Films, and Social Visuals.
5 Job Preparation (3)
Sensitization to Building Portfolio, Job/Cover Letter and Resume, Interview
Skills
Digital Media for Effective Communication (2)
6 Introduction, Current Trends in e-learning, Online Meetings, Digital Media
Tools and Apps for Enhancing Communication Skills

Total No. of Practical Sessions: 14

No. of
Practical Session Wise Breakup Practical
Sessions
Organizational Communication (2)
1 Verbal, Vocal and Non-Verbal Communication in Practice, Greetings and Self-
Introduction, Speech, and JAM.
Speaking Techniques at Different Forums (3)
2
Group Discussion, Role-play, Making and Presenting Power Point Presentations.
Practice on Reading and Technical Writing (3)
3 Reading Comprehension, Formal Letter Writing, Précis Writing, Notice, Email
Writing, Report Writing, and Statement of Purpose
Applying Critical Thinking Skills (3)
4
Book Review, Film Review, Social Visuals -Interpretation and Critical Analysis.
Towards Job Preparation (2)
5
Sensitization to Building Portfolio, Job/Cover Letter, Resume, Interview
Use of Digital Media for Effective Communication (1)
6
Training the students to use digital tools
 OBJECTIVES OF THE COURSE

The objective of the course content is:

CO1: To explain different aspects of communication process and enable the students to
develop a strong theoretical base to handle various real-life communication tasks.

CO2: To provide opportunities to the students to acquire and practice their LSRW skills in
English for effective communication in professional life.

CO3: To enable the students to articulate their ideas and perspectives using appropriate
communication strategies and tools.

CO4: To develop critical thinking and creative writing skills among the students and equip
them with necessary analytical tools to achieve success in personal and professional domains.

OUTCOMES OF THE COURSE

By the end of this course, the students will be able to:

1. Understand the basic concepts of effective communication and learn the importance
of communication skills for professional purposes.
2. Apply the four skills of language effectively by using latest learning strategies and
digital tools to create and produce original pieces of technical writing and speech.
3. Analyse and evaluate critically what they listen, read and write to respond
appropriately in different contexts of their personal and professional life.
 Course Name : CALCULUS

Course Code : MA2301

Credits : 4
L T P : 3-0-2
Total No. of Lectures : 42

Course Objectives:
At the end of the semester, the students should be able to

1 Understand the behavior of infinite series and their use.

2 Learn the concepts related to differential calculus of functions of several variables and their
applications.
3 Learn the concept and methods of evaluating multiple integrals and their applications to various
problems.

No. of
Lecture wise breakup
Lectures
1 INFINITE SERIES 12
Limits of sequences of numbers, Theorems of calculating limits of sequences, Infinite
series and convergence, alternating series, power series and convergence. Taylor’s and
Maclaurin’s Series. (Scope as in Chapter 8, Sections 8.1 – 8.9 of Text Book 1).
2 DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS 14
Functions of several variables, Limits and continuity, Partial Derivatives, Euler’s
Theorem for Homogeneous functions; Differentiability, Linearization and Differentials;
Chain rule; Extreme values and Saddle Points; Lagrange multipliers; Taylor’s Formula.
(Scope as in Chapter 12, Sections 12.1 – 12.6, 12.8 – 12.10 of Text Book 1).
3 INTEGRAL CALCULUS 16
Parametrization of plane curves, Polar coordinates, Graphing in Polar coordinates,
Cylinders and Quadric surfaces, Double integrals in Rectangular and Polar form, Triple
integrals in Rectangular, Cylindrical and Spherical Coordinates, Substitutions in
Multiple integrals. Applications to practical problems.
(Scope as in Chapter 9, Sections 9.4, 9.6 and 9.7 ,Chapter10, Sections10.6 and 10.7 and
Chapter 13, Sections 13.1, 13.3, 13.4,13.6 and 13.7 of Text Book 1).
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the semester, the students are able to

1 Test the behavior of infinite series.

2 Apply the concepts of differential calculus of functions of several variables.
3 Evaluate multiple integrals and apply them to practical problems.

Text Books:

1 Calculus and Analytic Geometry, Thomas and Finney, 9th edition, Pearson 2006
Education Asia.

Reference Books:

1 Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Wylie and Barrett, 6th edition, Mc Graw Hill. 2003

Practical / Lab work to be performed using Mathematica/ Matlab

1. Study the convergence of sequences through plotting.

2. Analyze the convergence of infinite series by plotting their sequences of partial sums.
3. Study the convergence of infinite series using Cauchy’s root test and Ratio test
4. Taylor and Maclaurin series of trigonometric, logarithmic, hyperbolic functions.
5. Plotting 2D curves in rectangular and polar coordinates.
6. Plotting 3D surfaces.
7. Find critical points and identify local maxima, local minima or saddle points
8. Draw the surfaces and analyze the existence of limits as they approach the specified points.
9. Check the continuity of functions
10. Draw the surfaces and find level curves at the given heights
 Course Name : LINEAR ALGEBRA, DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS AND
VECTOR CALCULUS
Course Code : MA2302
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-0-2
Total No. of Lectures : 42

Course Objectives:
At the end of the semester, the students should be able to

1 Learn the various concepts associated with real vector spaces and theory of matrices
2 Learn the methods to solve ordinary differential equations of various types.
3 Learn the various concepts of vector calculus and their applications to problems.

No. of
Lecture wise breakup
Lectures
1 ALGEBRA 16
Vector spaces over reals, Linear dependence, Basis, Dimension, Co-ordinates with
respect to a basis, Change of basis, Subspace, Linear transformation Rn →Rm,
Range space and Rank, Null space and Nullity, Rank and Nullity relation, Matrix
representation of a linear transformation, Similar matrices, Invertible linear
transformation, Eigenvalues and eigenvectors, Cayley Hamilton theorem,
Diagonalization of a matrix.

2 ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 12

First order exact differential equations, Integrating factor, Orthogonal trajectories,
Second and Higher order Linear Differential Equations with constant coefficients,
Differential Operators, Methods of Variation of Parameters and Undetermined
Coefficients, Euler Cauchy Equation, Wronskian.
.

3 VECTOR CALCULUS 14
Gradient, Divergence and Curl – their physical interpretation, Line, Surface and
Volume integrals, Green’s theorem in the plane, Stoke’s theorem, Divergence
theorem, Applications to Science and Engineering.
 Course Outcomes:
At the end of the semester, the students are able to

1 Solve the various problems related to real vector spaces and theory of matrices
2 Solve ordinary differential equations of various types

3 Apply various concepts of vector calculus to problems.

Text Books:

1 Introductory Linear Algebra with Applications, Kolman, B. and Hill,D.R., 7th 2001
edition, Pearson Education
2 Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Kreyszig, 8th edition, John Wiley and Sons. 2005

Reference Books:

1 Differential Equations, S. L. Ross, John Wiley and Sons, India 2004

2 Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Wylie and Barrett, 6th edition, Mc Graw Hill. 2003

3 Differential Equations, Frank Ayers, SI edition, Mc Graw Hill. 1972

Practical / Lab work to be performed using Mathematica/ Matlab

1. Perform basic Matrix operations.

2. Find rank, eigenvalues and eigenspace of matrices.
3. Check diagonalizability of matrices.
4. Solve ordinary differential equation.
5. Plotting of second order solution family of differential equation.
6. Plotting of third order solution family of differential equation.
7. Plotting of vector fields.
8. Find Gradient, Divergence and Curl.
9. Computation of line integrals and surface integrals.
10. Verify Green’s theorem in the plane, Stoke’s theorem, Divergence theorem.
Course Name : Electromagnetic Theory and Quantum Physics
Course Code : PY2301
Credits : 4
LTP : 302
Course Objectives:
1. To familiarize the students with the concepts of electrostatics and boundary value problems.
2. To make the students able to understand the magnetostatics and their boundary value problems.
3. To make the students able to understand and apply the concepts of electromagnetic wave propagation.
4. To familiarize the students with the concepts and principles of Quantum Mechanics.
Total No. of Lectures – 42

Lecture wise breakup Number of

Lectures
VECTORS, FIELDS AND ELECTROSTATICS:
1 Cartesian coordinate System, Cylindrical and Spherical coordinate Systems, Gradient,
Divergence of a Vector and Divergence Theorem, Curl of a vector and Stoke’s theorem, 12
Gauss’s law & its applications, Maxwell’s 1st eqn. (Electrostatics), Electric Energy and
potential, Potential gradient, the dipole fields, Energy density in an electrostatic field. Current
and current density, Continuity of current, Metallic conductors, Dielectric materials,
Electrostatic boundary-value problems, Introduction to Laplace’s and Poisson’s equations.
MAGNETOSTATICS:
Biot-Savart’s law, Ampere’s circuital law, Magnetic flux and magnetic flux density, Scalar and
vector magnetic potentials. Magnetic dipole, Force due to Magnetic field on a differential
2 current element, force between two differential current elements, Force and torque on a closed 10
circuit, magnetic materials, Magnetic boundary conditions, Inductors and inductances.

MAXWELL’S EQUATIONS AND ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVE PROPAGATION:

Faraday’s law, Displacement current, Maxwell’s equations in point form, Maxwell’s
equations in integral form, EM waves in general, EM wave propagation in Lossy Dielectrics,
Wave propagation in lossless dielectrics, Plane waves in free space, Plane waves in Good 10
3
conductors, Power & Poynting Vector, Reflection of a plane wave at normal incidence.
QUANTUM PHYSICS:
Need of Quantum theory, Photoelectric effect, The Compton effect; matter waves, group and
4 phase velocities; Uncertainty principle and its application; time independent and time 10
dependent Schrödinger wave equation; Eigen values and Eigen functions, Born’s
interpretation and normalization of wave function, applications of Schrödinger wave equation
for particle in one dimensional infinite potential well. Introduction to nanoscience, Quantum
materials, and Superconductivity.

Number of
List of Experiments:
Turns
To study dielectric constant and Curie temperature of Ferroelectric ceramic BaTiO3. 1
1
2 To determine coercivity of magnetic material using hysteresis loop tracer. 1
3 To study the Hall effect and to determine Hall Voltage (VH) and Hall coefficient (RH) 1
4 To determine the energy band gap of semiconductor (Ge) using Four Probe Method. 1
5 To design a method to draw equipotential lines with various geometries of electrodes kept at 1
different potentials.
6 To determine the flashing and Quenching Potential of neon/Argon and also to find the capacitance 1
of unknown capacitor.
7 To study the variation of magnetic field with distance along the axis of current carrying circular 1
coil using Stewart and Gee’s apparatus.
8 To plot I-V Characteristics of Solar cell. 1

Course Outcomes: By the end of the course

1 Students will be equipped with the tools of electromagnetic theory.
Students will be able to solve numerical problems based on electrostatics, magnetostatics, electromagnetic
2
wave propagation.
3 Students will be able to understand and apply the basic concepts of Quantum Mechanics.

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
Engineering Electromagnetics, William H Hyat, Jr., and John A. Buck, Tata McGraw Hill 2013 / 5th
1
edition
Elements of Engineering Electromagnetics, Matthew N.O. Sadiku, Oxford University Press 2012 / 4th
2
edition
Concepts of Modern Physics, Arthur Beiser, McGraw Hill Education (India) Pvt. Ltd., New 2013
3
Delhi.
Modern Physics, J. Bernstein, P.M. Fishbane and S.G. Gasiorowicz, Pearson, Education 2009
4
India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi
Course Name : Mechanics and Optics
Course Code : PY2302
Credits : 4
LTP : 3-0-2

Course Objectives:
1. To inculcate the application of Mechanics concepts in engineering
2. To familiarize students with Statics, Kinematics, and Kinetics of rigid body.
3. To familiarize the students with Ultrasonics and their applications.
4. To familiarize students the basic concepts of LASER and Nanotechnology for possible industrial applications.
Total No. of Lectures – 42

Lecture wise breakup Number of

Lectures
1 STATICS AND DYNAMICS:Analysis of system of forces, Equation of equilibrium in 10
space and its applications, Center of gravity, Centroid, mass, area and Polar moment of
inertia of simple and compound bodies. Kinematics of a Particle: Introduction, Motion of a
projectile, Kinetics of a particle: Force and acceleration, Work and energy, Impulse and
momentum.
PLANAR KINEMATICS AND KINETICS OF A RIGID BODY: Rigid-body
2 motion, Translation, Rotation about a fixed axis, Absolute general Plane Motion analysis. 12
Relative-Motion Analysis: Velocity, Instantaneous center of zero velocity, Acceleration.
Moment of Inertia, Planar Kinetic equations of motion, Equations of motion: Translation,
Rotation about a fixed axis and General Plane motion, Kinetic Energy, Work of a Force,
Work of a Couple, Principle of Work and Energy, Conservation of Energy, Linear and
Angular Momentum, Principle of Impulse and Momentum, Conservation of Momentum,
Eccentric Impact.
LASERS, OPTICAL FIBRES AND ULTRASONICS: Basics of Interference,
Diffraction and Polarization, Michelson–Morley Interferometer, Raman effect, Laser and
3 its characteristics, He-Ne laser, Ruby laser, Semiconductor lasers, Ultra-fast lasers, 12
Applications of Lasers, Optical fibres; Numerical aperture, Classification of optical fibres,
fibre Losses, fibre manufacturing, Applications of optical fibres. Production of ultrasonics,
detection and uses of ultrasonics, reverberation.
4 NANOTECHNOLOGY: Introduction, Length Scale, Size Dependence, Synthesis of 8
Nanoparticles: Mechanical Method, Sol-gel Technique, Physical Vapour Deposition,
Chemical Vapour Deposition, Overview of Carbon-based nanostructures, X-ray
Diffraction for nano-materials analysis, Applications of Nanotechnology, Introduction to
Quantum Materials and Superconductors.

List of Experiments No.of

Turns
1. Familiarization of students with basic instruments Vernier Calipers, Screw Gauge and 1
Spectrometer.
(i) To determine the wavelength of He-Ne laser using transmissiongrating. 1
2.
(ii) To determine the slit width using the diffraction pattern.
3. To find the specific rotation of sugar solution using a Bi-quartz Polarimeter.
4. To determine the acceleration of gravity using Kater's pendulum 1
5. To determine the Moment of Inertia of a Flywheel. 1
6. To determine the range of the projectile as a function of angle ofinclination and initial velocity. 1
7. To determine the velocity of ultrasonic waves in a given liquid. 1
8. To measure the centripetal force, Fc, and compare to Fc = mv2/r = mω2r. 1
Course Outcomes:
1 Students will be able to understand and implement the concepts of Mechanics, types of motions and
characteristics of rigid body.
Students will learn about lasers and fibre optics which have important applications for societal needs.
2
Students are expected to develop capability to tackle problems in general and in the various areas covered in
3
the course.

Suggested Books:
Sr.
No. Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher/Edition

1 Statics, R.C. Hibbeler, Pearson (11th Edition).

Dynamics, R.C. Hibbeler, Pearson (11th Edition).
2 Dynamics, F.P. Beer et al.,McGraw Hill (8th Edition).
3 Dynamics, Merriam and Kraige, Wiley and Sons (5th Edition).
4 Engineering Mechanics, G. Ramamurthy, R. S. Walia and Rajesh Kumar,I K International (3rd Edition).
5 Optics, AjoyGhatak, McGraw-Hill (3rd Edition).
6 Physics for Engineers, N.K. Verma, Prentice Hall India (3rdEdition).
7 Engineering Physics, Satya Prakash, PragatiPrakashan (9th Edition)
Course Name : CONDENSED MATTER PHYSICS

Course Code : PY2303

Credits : 4

L T P : 3 - 2/2

Total No. of Lectures – 42

Course Objectives:
1. To familiarize the students with basic concepts of the condensed phase of matter especially
solids.
2. To make the students able to understand the crystal structure, lattice vibrations, electronic
properties, dielectric and the magnetic properties etc. in relation to engineering applications.
3. To make the students able to understand the basics concepts of semiconductors,
superconductivity, and their applications in various fields.
4. To familiarize students the basic concepts of LASER and Nanotechnology for possible industrial
applications.

Lecture wise breakup No. of Lectures

Crystal structure and Band Theory of Solids: -Space lattices crystal structures (cubic
and hexagonal cells), close packed morphology (Hexagonal and cubic close packing),
single and polycrystalline structures, crystal Structure analysis, X-ray diffraction and
Bragg’s law, Classical and Quantum Theory of free electrons, Fermi-Dirac Distribution
1
Function, Density of States, Motion of electrons in magnetic field (Hall effect), Energy (14)
bands in solids. Introduction of Phonons, Vibrations of one dimensional monoatomic and
diatomic lattices, Momentum of Phonons. Electron in a Periodic Potential (Qualitative
idea of Kronig Penney Model ), Energy versus wave vector,

Dielectric and Magnetic Materials: Fundamental of dielectrics, active and passive

dielectrics, various polarization mechanisms, Frequency and temperature dependence on
polarization of dielectrics, Internal field, Dielectric Loss Tangent, Dielectric Breakdown.
2
Review of basic formulas, magnetic susceptibility, classification of materials, anti-
ferromagnetism and ferrimagnetism, ferromagnetism in metals, ferromagnetic domains, (7)
hysteresis,antiferromagnetism.

Semiconductors and Superconductivity: Introduction, Pure or Intrinsic

Semiconductors, impurity or Extrinsic semiconductors, Drift velocity, mobility and
Conductivity of Intrisic Semiconductors, carrier concentration and Fermi level for
Intrinsic and Extrinsic Semiconductors, Applications: P-N Junction diode, Zener diode
3
and Tunnel diode.Introduction to superconductivity, Mechanism of superconductivity, (14)
Meissner Effect, Effect of current and magnetic field, Type1 and Type II
superconductors, Thermal properties, Isotope effect, London Equations, Qualitative idea
of BCS theory, Applications of superconductivity.

Nanotechnology: Introduction, Length Scale, Size Dependence, Synthesis of

Nanoparticles: Mechanical Method, Sol-gel Technique, Physical Vapour Deposition,
4 Chemical Vapour Deposition, Overview of Carbon-based nanostructures, X-ray (7)
Diffraction for nano-materials analysis, Applications of Nanotechnology, Introduction to
Quantum Materials.

S.No List of Experiments No. of

 turns

1. To study dielectric constant and Curie temperature of Ferroelectric ceramic 1

BaTiO3.
2. To determine coercivity of magnetic material using hysteresis loop tracer. 1

3. To study the Hall effect and to determine Hall Voltage (VH) and Hall coefficient 1
(RH)
4. To determine the energy band gap of semiconductor (Ge) using Four Probe 1
Method.
5. To design a method to draw equipotential lines with various geometries of 1
electrodes kept at different potentials.
6. To determine the flashing and Quenching Potential of neon/Argon and also to 1
find the capacitance of unknown capacitor.
7. To study the variation of magnetic field with distance along the axis of current 1
carrying circular coil using Stewart and Gee’s apparatus.

Course Outcomes: By the end of the course

1 Students will be able to understand the physics behind structural properties of the solids.

2 Students will be aware of latest developments in certain areas of condensed matter physics, which
have important applications for societal needs.
3 Students are expected to develop capability to tackle problems in general and in various areas
covered in the course.

Suggested Books:
Sr. No
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher
Introduction to Solid State Physics, Charles Kittel, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi (8th
1. Edition)
2. Solid State Physics, S.O. Pillai, New Age International, Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi (5th Edition)
3. Solid State Physics, M. A. Wahab, Narosa Publishing House, Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi (3rd
Edition).
4. Solid State Physics R.K. Puri, V.K.Babbar, S. Chand & Company, Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi (3rd
Edition).
Departmental Core Courses
Course Name : ELEMENTS OF MANUFACTURING PROCESSES
Course Code : MEN3001
Credits : 4
LTP : 3-0-2

Sr.No. Course Objectives:

1. To familiarize the students with the basic tools and equipment’s used in manufacturing shops.
2. To familiarize with basic manufacturing processes, techniques, use of machine tool etc.
3. To introduce the practical knowledge on different aspects of manufacturing processes.
To familiarize with the production of basic raw materials like casting, powder metallurgy, and
4.
secondary processes like forming, joining, and assembly.

No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
1. INTRODUCTION: Introduction to Manufacturing, Classification, Concept of product
design and development, Manufacturing activities inside and outside the factory,
Inventory, storing of materials and shop floor control, Industrial safety, Materials in 6
manufacturing, Conventional, Lean, Green, Sustainable and Smart Manufacturing,
Computer integrated manufacturing.
2. CASTING: Definition and significance, Raw materials for casting, Patterns, Mould, Core
and core making; Cupola, Induction and Resistance heating furnaces, Open hearth and Pit
furnace; Sand casting, Mechanics of solidifications, Chvorinov’s rule and Caine’s
principle, Centre line resistance factor, Adams and Taylor method; Design of gating
system, runner and riser, Calculation of Reynold number and types of flow, Aspiration
7
effect; Pouring time calculation, Degassing, Fettling, Casting defects: Causes and their
remedial actions; Centrifugal casting and estimation of mould rotational speed, carbon
dioxide, plaster mould casting, shell moulding, precision casting, investment casting, die
casting, Continuous casting; Inspection, testing, defects and salvaging techniques of
defects.
3. METAL FORMING: Definition, Classification, Hot and Cold working processes; Bulk
deformation processes: Rolling, Thread rolling, Piercing, Mechanics of seam less tube
manufacturing, Spinning, Extrusion, Estimation of extrusion pressure and force; Wire,
tube, cup and deep drawing; Forging, bending, shearing, coining, embossing, punching,
blanking, fullering, edging, trimming; Open and closed die forging, and estimation of 8
compressive force; Hydroforming, electrohyraulic, electromagnetic and Stretch forming;
Rotary swaging, ring rolling, gear rolling, planetary and tandem rolling, Erichsen cupping,
spline shaft rolling, transverse rolling dies and hybrid forming; Forming defects: causes
and remedial actions.
4. WELDING: Definition, classification, mechanics of homogeneous, heterogeneous and
autogeneous welding, weldability. Arc welding: physics of arc welding, types, CAW,
SMAW, FCAW, GMAW, IGAW, GTAW, TIGW, MIG, submerged and plasma arc
welding; Atomic hydrogen, electro slag, electron beam, laser beam and stud welding;
Electrodes: Types, classification and codification, selection procedure and applications;
Resistance welding: Principle, types, Spot-welding and spot welding machine, Projection,
Seam, Butt, Percussion welding; Solid state welding: Cold, diffusion, ultrasonic, 9
explosive, FSW, HPW, Flow welding, forge and friction welding; Thermochemical
welding: Principle, types, applications; Thermit welding; Gas welding: Types, Physics of
oxy-acetylene gas welding, different zone and temperature of oxy-acetylene flames, and
applications. Oxy-flame cutting: Principle, types, application; Brazing and soldering:
Principle, types, materials, application in macro and micro domain, Fabrication of PC
integrated circuit board; Welding defects: Causes and remedial actions.
 5. POWDER METALLURGY: Powder metallurgy: principle, advantages and limitations,
Methods of producing powders, Flow process and operations involved in making metal
powder parts, Powder blending, compaction and sintering, Manufacturing of micro 7
dimensional spur gear, Processing of ceramic materials, Defects, salvaging techniques and
Applications of powder metallurgy.
6. PROCESSING OF PLASTICS: Building of chain from gas to solid, Raw materials for
plastics, Polymerization, Types of plastics, Flow process for fabrication and processing of
5
plastics, Calendering’s, Rotational, Injection and Blow molding, Helmet and Pepsi type
bottle manufacturing; Defects, and salvaging techniques.

List of Experiments: No. of

Turns
1 Carpentry section: (i) half lap T & L-joint, (ii) pattern of hexagonal nut. 2
2 Foundry section: (i) mould making, (ii) casting hexagonal nut. 2
Fitting & Electroplating: (i) Filing, leveling & surface marking, (ii) buffing and electroplating
3 2
on sheet metal
4 Electrical section: (i) electrical wiring, (ii) electrical connection of bulb, tube, heater. 2
5 Welding section: (i) arc welding: V, L,T joints, (ii) spot welding on sheet metal. 2
6 Automobile Section: (i) study automobile engine, battery connection and study ignition system 2
Siemens Automatic Manufacturing Section: (i) Study of robotics, (ii) study of CNC machine,
7 2
(iii) study of AGMS.

Sr. Course outcomes: Knowledge level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
Understand the concept of manufacturing, product design, selection of raw
1 L2
materials, storing and process planning.
Plan and apply the different manufacturing processes to fabricate the ferrous,
2 L3
nonferrous and composite materials.
Analyze the possible defects during casting, powder metallurgy, processing
3 L4
of plastics, forming, welding, and ability to rectify the defects.
Ability to select and apply the suitable primary manufacturing processes to
4 L3
make desire feature of products.
5 Estimate the pouring and solidification time of metal casting. L5
Design and adapt different gating system, runner and riser to cast product /
6 L6
parts, dies for engineering components.

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 3 3 - 1 - - - - - 1 2 2 1
CO2 3 2 3 1 2 - - - - - 2 1 3 2
CO3 1 3 1 3 1 - - - - - 2 2 3 1
CO4 3 3 1 1 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 2
CO5 3 1 1 3 2 - - - - - 1 1 3 1
CO6 2 2 3 3 3 - - - - - 1 1 3 2

Suggested Books
Sr. Name of the Book/ Authors/Publisher Year of
No. Publication/
Reprint
1 Manufacturing Engineering and Technology; Serope Kalpakjian and Steven
R. Schmid, 4th ed., Pearson. 2007
2 Principles of Manufacturing Materials and Processes; Campbell-Tata McGraw
1999
Hill.
 3. Fundamentals of Modern Manufacturing, Mikell P. Groover, 5th ed., Wiley 2013
4. Material and Processes in Manufacturing, E.P. Degarmo, Ronald A. Kohser,
2017
and J. T. Black; Prentice Hall of India
5. Manufacturing Processes, P.C. Sharma, S. Chand Publication. 2008

Course Name : ELEMENTS OF THERMODYNAMICS

Course Code : MEN3002
Credits : 4
LT P : 3-1-0

Course Objectives:
1 Understand the importance of thermodynamics.
2 Basic understanding of various types of thermodynamic systems.
3 Understand the basic principles of thermodynamics systems.
4 Understand the various types of boilers.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
1 BASIC CONCEPTS: Introduction of thermodynamics, Concept of Continuum,
Thermodynamic System, Surrounding and Boundary, Thermodynamic Equilibrium,
State, Path, Process, cycle, Quasi-static Process, Reversible and Irreversible Process, 5
Working Substance, Thermodynamic Properties, Zeroth Law of Thermodynamics,
Temperature Scales, Concept of Heat and work in Thermodynamics.
2 FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS: Joule’s Paddle Wheel Experiment,
Mechanical Equivalent of Heat, First Law thermodynamics for closed and open
systems, Different forms of stored Energy, Enthalpy, Energy of an isolated System, 5
Perpetual Motion Machine of First kind. Flow Process, Control Volume, work and
Energy Equations, Throttling Process, Non-Flow work.
3 STEADY FLOW ENERGY EQUATION (Flow Processes and 1st Law): Flow
rate and continuity equation, Flow process and control volume, Flow work or flow
energy, Steady and unsteady flow process, Steady flow energy equation (SFEE), 2
Engineering applications of steady flow energy equation, Throttling process, Flow
work and non-flow work, Flow work processes.
4 SECOND LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS: Limitations of First Law, Second
Law of thermodynamics, Heat and Work, Thermal Reservoir, Planck and Clausius
statements, Energy Analysis of Heat Engine, Refrigerator and Heat Pump, 5
Reversibility and Irreversibility, Carnot Theorem and cycle, Efficiency of the
Reversible Heat Engine, Thermodynamic Temperature scale.
5 ENTROPY: Clausius Theorem, Clausius Inequality and concept of Entropy,
Entropy: Principle, Entropy generation in closed and open System, Thermodynamics
5
Equations relating properties of System, Reversible Adiabatic work in a Steady flow
System, Entropy and disorder.
6 AVAILABLE ENERGY AND AVAILABILITY: Available Energy referred to a
cycle, Quality of work, Maximum work in Reversible Process, Useful work, Dead 4
State, Availability, Second Law Efficiency.
7 GAS POWER CYCLES: Air Standard efficiency, Mean Effective Pressure, Otto,
Diesel, Dual, Brayton, Stirling and Ericson Cycle, Comparison of cycles. Equation
4
of state of a gas, Introduction to Two stroke and Four stroke Petrol and Diesel
Engine.
 8 PROPERTIES OF PURE SUBSTANCES: P-v, T-s, h-s, diagram for a Pure
Substance, Properties of Pure substance with special reference to water, Steam and
its formation, Wet Dry, Saturated and Superheated Steam, sensible, Latent heat,
Dryness fraction and its determination, Separating and Throttling calorimeter 5
Enthalpy, Entropy and Internal Energy of Steam, Use of Steam Table and Mollier
Diagram, Basic Thermodynamic Processes of Steam in Closed and Open System and
their representation on P-V and H-S chart.
9 INTRODUCTION TO STEAM GENERATORS/BOILERS: Classification
of boilers, fire tube boilers, water tube boilers, comparison between water tube and
3
fire tube boilers, guidelines for the choice of a new boiler, essentials of a good
boiler, boiler mountings and accessories.
10 VAPOUR POWER CYCLE: Carnot and Rankine Steam Power Cycle, Actual
Vapour cycle Processes, Comparison of Carnot and Rankine cycle, Mean
Temperature of Heat Addition, Reheat Cycle, Ideal Regenerative Cycle Reheat 4
Regenerative Cycle, Feed Water Heater, Characteristics of an Ideal working fluid in
Vapor Power cycle.

Sr. Course outcomes: Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Understand various laws of thermodynamics and their application to various L2
systems.
2 Apply the basics of thermodynamics in various engineering applications. L3
3 Analyze the performance of vapor and gas power cycles, phase-change L4
processes, and other thermodynamics processes.
4 Examine the close and open thermodynamic systems, and find the optimized L5
solution(s).
5 Analyze and effectively utilize the thermal appliances in day-to-day life. L4
CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 1 1
CO2 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - - - 2 1
CO3 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO5 2 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 3 2 2

Suggested Books:
Sr. Year of
No. Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
Reprint
1 Engineering Thermodynamics, Gordon Rogers & Yon Machew, Pearson 2006
2 Thermodynamics, Yunus Cengel and Mike Boles, 9th ed., McGraw Hill 2019
3 Thermodynamics, C. P. Arora, McGraw Hill 2017
4 Engineering Thermodynamics, P.K. Nag, McGraw Hill 2005
5 Thermodynamics, D.S. Kumar, S.K. Kataria & Sons 2013
Course Name : MECHANICS OF MATERIALS
Course Code : MEN3003
Credits : 3
L T P : 2-1-0

Course Objectives: In this course, the student should be able to

1. Understand the advance topics of strength of materials and apply these to engineering problems.
2. Develop the basic skills and knowledge required to analyze stress, strain and failure in deformable solids.

Total No. of Lectures – 28

Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
STRAIN ENERGY: Strain Energy of various types of loads under different loading
conditions, total strain energy for a 3-D state of stress, strain energy of dilation and
1 distortion for a 3-D state of stress, Castigliano’s theorem and its application in 4
determination of deflection of beams, Maxwell’s reciprocal theorem of deflection
and its applications
THEORIES OF FAILURES: Need for theories of failure, Different theories of
failures e.g. Maximum principal stress theory, Maximum principal strain theory,
2 Maximum shear stress theory, strain energy theory and shear strain energy theory 4
and their comparisons; Graphical representation and yield locus of the above
theories of failures for 2-D state of stress.
SPRINGS: Close and open coiled helical springs under axial load and axial
3 5
moment, leaf springs, flat spiral spring.
THIN AND THICK SHELLS: Thin cylinders and sphere, thick cylinders and
4 sphere, comparison of thin and thick shell theories, compound cylinders, hub-shrunk 5
on solid shaft.
BENDING OF CURVED BARS: Stresses in bar of small initial curvature and of
5 large initial curvature, deflection of curved bars, stresses and deflection of curved 5
beams in crane hook and circular links of various cross section
3-D STRESS SYSTEM: State of stress at point, Differential equilibrium equations
6 in Cartesian coordinate system, stress invariants, stress component on an arbitrary 5
plane, principal stresses and Mohr’s stress circle

Course outcomes: By the end of this course, the student will be able to:
Understand the philosophies of mechanics of materials in engineering and applied sciences L2
1
problems.
Evaluate any mechanical system as a model which is acted upon by various loads and stresses L5
2
induced in it.
3 Apply the concept of mechanics of materials on advance system for its 3-D stress analysis. L3
Analyze the failure analysis under static loading in ductile and brittle materials using different L4
4
theories of failures.
5 Develop the vessels and other machine components. L6
6 Ability to conduct various tests on materials to assess their mechanical properties. L4

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2
CO
2 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
1
CO
3 3 3 1 - - - - - - - - 3 1
2
CO 3 2 2 1 - - - - - - - - 3 1
 3
CO
2 3 2 3 - - - - - - - - 3 1
4
CO
2 3 3 1 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
5
CO
1 1 1 3 - - - - 2 2 - 1 2 2
6

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
1 Engg. Mechanics of Solids, E.P. Popav, Pearson Education. 2003
Mechanics of Materials, FP Beer and R Johnson, Tata-McGraw Hill Publishers,
2 2005
India
3 Mechanics of Materials, Gere, Thomson Books. 2004
4 An Introduction to the Mechanics of Solids, Crandall & Dahl, McGraw Hill. 2012
5 Mechanics of Material, Kirpal Singh, Standard Publisher. 2013
6 Strength of Material, D S Bedi, Khanna Book Publication. 2010
7 Strength of Material, R K Rajput, S Chand Publication. 2012
8 Advanced Mechanics of Solids – L.S. Srinath (Tata McGraw Hill) 2017

Course Name : KINEMATICS OF MACHINES

Course Code : MEN3004
Credits : 3
L-T-P : 2-1-0

Sr. Course Objectives

No. In this course, the student should be able to:
1. Understand the basics of machines and mechanisms.
Understand the concepts of kinematic diagrams, kinematic chains & mobility, mechanisms and
2.
Kinematic analysis.
Study of cam profiles, motion generation, and application in machinery, covering kinematics,
3.
dynamics, and practical design considerations
Analysis, design, and application of transmission elements like belts, ropes, and chains in mechanical
4.
systems
5. Understand about types and working of brakes and dynamometers.

Total No. of Lectures - 28

Lectures wise Breakup No. of
Lectures
Mechanisms and Machines: Mechanism and machine, Types of constrained motion,
Rigid and resistant bodies, Link, Kinematic pair, Types of joints, Degree of freedom,
1 Classifications of kinematic pairs, Kinematic chain, Linkage, mechanism and 4
structure, Mobility of mechanism, Equivalent mechanism, The four-bar chain,
Transmission angle, Single slider crank chain and Double slider crank chain.
 Velocity Analysis: Absolute and relative motions, Motion of a link, Four-link
mechanism, Velocity images, Angular velocity of links, Velocity of rubbing, Slider
2 crank mechanism, crank and slotted lever mechanism, Instantaneous centre (I-Centre), 4
Kennedy’s theorem, Locating I-Centres, Angular velocity ration theorem and
Centrode.
Acceleration analysis: Acceleration, Four link mechanism, Acceleration of
intermediate and offset points, Slider crank mechanism, Coriolis acceleration
3 components, Crank and slotted lever mechanism, Algebraic method, Kleins 4
construction and Velocity and acceleration from displacement time curve.
Cams: Types of cams, Types of followers, Definitions, Follower displacement
4 programming, Derivations of follower motion, High-speed cams, Undercutting, 5
Motions of followers and Layout of cam profiles
Belt, Rope and Chains: Belt and rope drives, Open and cross belt drive, Action of
belts on pulleys, Velocity ratio, Slip, material for Belts and ropes, Crowning of
pulleys, Types of pulleys, law of belting, Length of belt, Cone (Stepped) pulleys,
5 Ration of friction tensions, Power transmitted, Centrifugal effects on belts, Maximum 5
power transmitted, Centrifugal effects on belts, Maximum power transmitted by belt,
Initial tension, Creep, Chains, Chain Length, angular speed ratio and Classification of
chains.
Brakes and Dynamometers: Types of brakes, Block or shoe brakes, band brakes,
Band and block brakes, Internal expanding shoe brake, Effect of braking, Types of
6 dynamometers, Prony brake dynamometer, Rope brake dynamometer, Hydraulic 6
dynamometer, Belt transmission dynamometer, Epicyclic train dynamometer and
Bevis Gibson torsion dynamometer.

Sr. Course outcomes: Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
Identify common mechanisms used in machines and everyday life and
L1 & L3
1. determine the mobility (number of degrees-of-freedom) of planar structures,
and mechanisms.
Perform complete translational and rotational mechanism velocity analysis L3 & L4
2. and acceleration analysis.
3. Construct and analyze cam profiles for a specified motion of the follower L6
Understand and evaluate various power transmission elements for their
4. kinematic domain. L2, L5
Determine frictional torque and power in brakes and dynamometers and L2
5. their applications in mechanical systems.

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 3 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO2 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO3 2 3 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO4 1 1 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO5 1 1 1 3 - - - - 2 2 - 1 3 2
Suggested Books:
Sr. Year of
No. Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
Reprint
Theory of Machines, V.P. Singh, Dhanpat Rai & Co. Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi.
1. 2014
2. Theory of Machines, P.L. Ballaney, Khanna publishers, New Delhi. 1994
3. Theory of Machines, Shigley, Tata McGraw Hill. 1981
4. Mechanism & Machine Theory, J.S. Rao & R.V. Dukhipati, Wiley Eastren Ltd. 1992
Theory of Mechanisms, Amitabh Gosh & A.K. Mallik, East West Press Machines
5. 2008
Private Ltd.
6. Theory of Machines, S. S. Rattan, McGraw Hill Education (India) 2019

Course Name : PHYSICAL METALLURGY AND HEAT TREATMENT

Course Code : MEN3005
Credits : 3
LTP : 3-0-0

Course Objective: The course aims to impart the fundamental knowledge about:
Understanding the crystal structure and microstructures of metals and alloys, including solid
1.
solutions and multiple phase alloys.
Understanding the principles behind the mechanical behavior of metals and alloys in terms of
2.
dislocation motion.
3. Phase-diagrams, Iron-Carbon diagram.
Becoming familiar with the properties of ferrous and non-ferrous metals, composites and polymeric
4.
materials that will help to select the materials for various engineering applications
Heat treatment cycles and their applications to modify the properties of metallic and non-metallic
5.
materials.
No. of Lectures - 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
INTRODUCTION TO CRYSTALLOGRAPHY:
Bonding in solids: ionic, amorphous, and crystalline, unit cell, Bravais lattice,
atomic arrangements in solids, space lattices, coordination number, effective
1. 4
number of atoms, stacking sequence and atomic packing factor for common
crystalline structures: FCC, BCC and HCP, indexing of crystallographic planes and
directions. linear and planer densities
STRUCTURAL IMPERFECTIONS:
Point defects: vacancies, self interstitiality, impurities, Frenkel and Schottky defect,
2. 4
line defect: edge and screw dislocations, surface defects: grain boundaries, low
angle boundaries, twin boundaries, and stacking faults, volume defects
ALLOYS AND PHASE DIAGRAMS:
Constitution of alloys, Solid solutions, substitutional and interstitial, phase
3. diagrams, Isomorphism, eutectic, eutectoid, peritectic, and peritectoid reactions, 6
cooling curves, unary & binary phase diagrams, Gibbs’s phase rule, Lever rule,
Iron-carbon equilibrium diagram
DEFORMATION OF METALS
Elastic and plastic deformation, mechanism of plastic deformation, twinning,
conventional and true stress strain curves for polycrystalline materials, yield point
4. 6
phenomena, strain ageing, work hardening, Bauschinger effect, season cracking.
Recovery, re-crystallization and grain growth.
 FERROUS AND NON-FERROUS METALS:
Classification of ferrous and non-ferrous metals, Cast-iron microstructure,
properties and application. Effect of alloying elements on properties of steels, α and
β stabilizers, stainless and tool steels, HSLA, OHNS, Grey, white, malleable,
5. 5
nodular cast iron, spheroidal cast irons, Copper and copper alloys: Brass, Bronze
and Cupronickel, Al and Al-Cu, precipitation strengthening treatment, white metal,
bearing alloys, Mg-alloys, Ag and its alloys, Zn and its alloys, Ni-based super
alloys, Ni-Cr alloys, Inconel, monel, Titanium alloys, applications
MATERIAL PROPERTIES AND TESTING
Hardness test (Brinell, Vickers, and Rockwell), Testing of materials under tensile,
6. compressive and shear loads, impact test (Charpy and IZOD), Fatigue test: S-N 6
curve, methods of improving fatigue life, Creep test: creep curve, creep fracture,
material consideration for high temperature use.
HEAT TREATMENT:
Definition, objectives, classification; annealing, spheroidizing, normalizing,
hardening, tempering, nitiriding, carburizing, flame and induction hardening,
7. 6
cyaniding, boronizing, Isothermal transformation, T-T-T curve and austempering of
steel, cooling curves superimposed on I.T. diagram, CCR, Hardenability, Jominy
end quench test, Martempering, Vacuum and Plasma hardening.
CERAMIC, COMPOSITES, AND POLYMERS
Ceramics: types of ceramics, fabrication and processing of ceramics: (i) glass
forming processes (ii) particulate forming processes (iii) cementation, Composites:
advantages of composites, constituents of composites, applications of composites,
8. 5
classification of composites: based on matrix and reinforcement, Polymers:
hydrocarbon and polymer molecules, molecular shape and structure, molecular
configuration, thermoplastic and thermosetting polymers.

Sr. Course outcomes:

No. The students will be able to:
1 Identify and interpret the properties of metals with respect to crystal structure and grain size.
2 Classify and distinguish different types of steels, cast irons, non-ferrous alloys and ceramic materials
Know the mechanical properties of materials and will be able to choose a suitable material for a
3
particular engineering application.
Know about the Iron-carbon phase diagram and the characteristics features of various phases of steel
4
and cast iron.
Describe the heat treatment processes, mechanism of phase transformation and effect of heating and
5
cooling rate on phase transformation and mechanical properties.

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 1 1 2 - - - - - - - 2 2 1
CO2 3 1 2 2 - - - - - - - 2 3 1
CO3 3 1 1 2 - - - - - - - 2 3 2
CO4 3 1 2 1 - - - - - - - 2 2 2
CO5 3 1 2 2 - - - - - - - 2 2 2

Sr. Name of the Book/ Authors/Publisher Year of

No. Publication/
Reprint
1 Material Science and Engineering: An Introduction/ William D. Calister/ John Wiley 2007
and Sons
2 Materials Science and Engineering/ William F Smith, Javed Hashemi, Ravi Prakash 2008
 /Tata McGraw Hill,
3 Mechanical Behaviour of Materials /Thomas H. Courtney/ McGraw Hill, 2015
4 Heat Treatment: Principles and Techniques/TV Rajan, CP Sharma/PHI Learning 2023

Course Name : FLUID MECHANICS

Course Code : MEN3006
Credits : 3
L T P : 2-1/2-2/2

Course Objectives:
1 To understand the basic concept of fluid mechanics.
2 To understand statics, dynamics and various approaches to fluid mechanics.
3 To correlate fundamentals of fluid mechanics with various mechanical systems
4 To understand basic concepts of the boundary layer theory and turbulence
Total No. of Lectures –28
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
Introduction: Basic Concepts and Definitions, Properties of Fluid, Viscosity, Capillarity,
1 3
Surface Tension, Compressibility, Normal and Shear Stresses in Fluid Flows.
Fluid Statics: Types of Forces on Fluid Element, Mechanics of Fluid at Rest and in Rigid
2 Body Motion, Manometry, Hydrostatic Forces on Fully and Partially Submerged Bodies, 4
Stability of a Floating Body.
Kinematics of Fluid Flow: Lagrangian and Eulerian Methods, Description of Properties
in a Moving Fluid, Local and Convective Acceleration, Streamlines, Path Lines, Streak
3 4
Lines, Acceleration and Rotation of a Fluid Particle, Vorticity and Circulation, Stream
Function, Velocity Potential Function.
Dynamics of Fluid Flow: Basic Physical Laws of Fluid Mechanics, The Reynolds
Transport Theorem, Equation of Conservation of Mass, Differential Form of Continuity
4 4
Equation, Navier-Stokes Equations, Euler’s Equation of Motion, Frictionless Flow -
Bernoulli’s Equation, Applications to Flow Measurement and other Real Flow Problems
Viscous Flow: Regimes of Flow, Pressure Gradient in Steady Uniform Flow, Qualitative
Aspects of Viscous Flows, Exact solutions of Navier-Stokes Equations, Laminar Flow
5 5
Through a Pipe - Hagen-Poiseulli’s Flow, Transition from Laminar to Turbulent Flow,
Turbulent Flow Through a Pipe, Friction Factor, Applications to Pipe Networks.
Flow Past Immersed Bodies: Reynolds Number and Geometry Effects, Momentum
Integral Estimates, Boundary Layer (BL) Equations, Flow Over a Flat-Plate, Boundary
6 5
Layers with Pressure Gradients, Laminar and Turbulent BL, Separation of BL and Control
of Flow Separation, Streamlined and Bluff Body.
Dimensional Analysis and Similitude: Buckingham’s Theorem, Non-Dimensional
7 Groups, Geometric, Kinematic and Dynamic Similarity, Modeling of Fluid Flows, 3
Applications.

List of Experiments: No. of Turns

1 To determine the metacentric height of a given vessel under unloaded condition. 1
Verification of Bernoulli’s theorem and measurement of velocity using Pitot
2 2
tube.
To determine the Coefficient of discharge through Venturi meter and Orifice
3 2
meter.
4 To determine the different types of flow Patterns by Reynolds’s experiment. 1
5 To determine the Friction factor and loss coefficients for the different pipes. 1
 Sr. Course outcomes: Knowledge Level
No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Understand the basic concept of fluid mechanics. L2
2 Apply the principles of fluid statics and dynamics to real life problems. L3
Correlate and implement the fundamentals of fluid mechanics to analyze
3 L4
simple hydrodynamics systems.
4 Examine the basic fluid flow problems through analytical tools. L5
Introduction to the concept of boundary layer and its implementation to solve
5 L4
practical fluid flow problems.

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 1 -
CO2 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 2 2 -
CO3 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 2 3 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 2

Suggested Books:
Sr. Year of Publication/
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher
No. Reprint
Fluid Mechanics by Frank .M. White, McGraw Hill Publishing Company
1 2017
Ltd.
Fluid Mechanics and Fluid Power Engineering by D.S. Kumar, S.K. Kataria
2 2013
& Sons
Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines by R.K. Bansal, Laxmi
3 2023
Publications
Fundamentals of Fluid Mechanics by Munson, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd, 7th
4 2015
edition
Fluid Mechanics: Fundamentals and Applications, Yunus A. Cengel, John
5 2019
M. Cimbala, McGraw Hill Education; 4th edition

Course Name : MANUFACTURING PROCESSES

Course Code : MEN4001
Credits : 4
LTP : 3-0-2

Sr.No. Course Objectives:

1. To impart the knowledge of machine tools, cutting tools and tooling system used in metal cutting.
To impart the knowledge of press tools and dies, and their applications in the manufacturing
2.
processes.
To impart the knowledge of design of jig and fixture, their application to locate and hold the
3. component, and proper clamping.
To impart the knowledge of advanced non-conventional and hybrid machining techniques and their
4. applications for processing of conductive and non-conductive materials.
To impart the knowledge of rapid prototyping methods, rapid product development technique and
5. its applications.
 No. of Lectures - 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
MACHINE TOOLS:
All types of Lathes, Shaper, Slater, Planar, Milling, Drilling, Grinding, Broaching,
Sawing machines: Principle, components, applications.
1. 6
CNC Machines: Type, Specification, Components of CNC machines, Open and
close loop control system, G-codes and M-codes, CNC part programming,
Applications.
METAL CUTTING:
Single and Multipoint cutting tools; Tool geometry, True rake and shear angles,
Fundamental of metal cutting: orthogonal and oblique cutting, Cutting fluids and
application; Mechanism of chip formation; Classification and types of chips, Chip
2. 10
formation in drilling and milling; Chip breaker, Merchant force diagram; Force
analysis during turning and drilling; Tool wear, failure and tool life; Design of form
tool; Machinability, Thermal and Economics aspect of metal cutting, Advanced
cutting tools and materials; Manufacturing of cutting tools,
JIGS AND FIXTURES:
Definition, significance, classification, degrees of freedom, principle of locating
3. elements and clamping, clamping devices, drill bushes; Design of jigs and fixtures; 6
Jigs and fixtures for milling, drilling, grinding.
PRESS TOOLS AND DIES:
Press working equipment’s and tools; Types of dies, components of cutting die;
4. Mechanism and techniques of reducing cutting forces. Blanking, Piercing, Drawing, 7
Bending, and Forging die design. Design of die blocks, punches and strippers; Strip
layout, die materials, Advance processes for die manufacturing.
NON-CONVENTIONAL AND HYBRID MACHINING PROCESSES:
Objectives, USM, AJM, CH, ECM, Electrochemical grinding, deburring and honing,
EDM, WEDM, LBM, EBM, ECSM, TWECDM, LAECSM: working principle,
5. Process description, performance characterization, parametric effect, capabilities, 8
limitations and applications. Introduction to micro machining, micro-turning, micro-
milling, micro-drilling, micro EDM, micro-ECM. Introduction to advance finishing
process: AFM, EEM, CMP, and applications.
RAPID PROTOTYING:
Classifications, types, principles and advantages of rapid prototyping. Fused
6. Deposition Modelling (FDM), Selective Laser Sintering (SLS), Stereolithography 5
(SLA), Laminated object manufacturing (LOM): parameters, factors effecting the
responses of rapid prototyping, Accuracy, Economic, and Applications.

List of Experiments No. of Turns

1 CNC programming and machining operations: To develop the part programme for
3
turning, taper turning, thread cutting.
2 Gear cutting on Milling machine. 2
3 Analysis of tool wear using stereo-zoom and metallurgical microscope. 1
4 Study the process parameters and experimental setups of EDM and Wire EDM
2
processes.
5 Drilling micro holes in hard to machine materials using Fast drill EDM setup. 2
6 Fabrication of plastic components using Injection molding setup. 2
7 Study and development of products using FDM based 3D printing. 2

Sr. Course outcomes: Knowledge

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: Level
(Blooms
 Level)

1 Clear the basic concept of machine tools, cutting tools and tooling system used in
L1
metal cutting
2 Outline the basic concepts and understanding about the orthogonal and oblique
cutting, chip formation, failure of cutting tool and tool life. . L2

3 Knowledge of advanced non-conventional and hybrid machining techniques and

L3
their applications for processing of conductive and non-conductive materials.
4 Outline the basic concept micro machining processes and rapid prototyping, CNC L4
programing, and analysis of tool wear.
5 Design of jig and fixture, locate and hold the component, proper clamping and
L5
their applications
6 Design of press tools and dies, and their applications in the manufacturing
processes and formulate the ideas with innovative concepts for developing L6
advanced machining setup, tool and tooling system,

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 3 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO2 3 3 2 2 - - 1 - - - - 1 3 1
CO3 3 2 2 3 2 - 1 - - - - 1 3 2
CO4 2 3 2 3 2 - 2 - - - 2 1 3 3
CO5 3 2 2 3 2 - - - - - 1 2 2 2
CO6 3 3 2 1 1 - - - - - 1 2 3 2

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology, Serope Kalpakjian and Steven R.
1 2013
Schmid- 4thed., Pearson Edition.
Manufacturing Science, Amitava Ghosh and Asok Kumar Mallik, East-West Press
2 1993
Pvt Ltd., New Delhi.
3 Advance Machining Processes, V K Jain; Allied publishers, New Delhi. 2009
Manufacturing Processes, B.S. Raghuvanshi, Publisher, Dhanpat Rai & Co. (P)
4 2020
Ltd

Course Name : APPLIED THERMODYNAMICS

Course Code : MEN4002
Credits : 4
LTP : 3-0-2

Course Objectives:
1 To develop an understanding of thermodynamics as it applies to real systems.
To develop problem-solving skills through the application of thermodynamics and the use of lab
2
studies to reinforce knowledge gained in theory classes.
To introduce students to the various conventional applied thermal systems, such as IC Engines,
3
Compressors, Turbines, Condensers, Nozzles, and Diffusers.
4 To analyze, optimize, and design newer thermodynamics systems.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
I.C. ENGINES: Introduction to IC Engines, Classification of IC engines, Engine
parts and their functions, Valve timing diagrams, Combustions in CI and SI Engines,
Cooling System, Lubrication system, Performance analysis of IC Engines,
1 8
Performance curves for CI and SI engine, Measurement of Indicated Power and
Brake Power, Performance Parameters, Morse Test, Heat balance sheet and
Performance Characteristics.
RECIPROCATING COMPRESSOR: Introduction, classification of air
compressors, work input and the best index of compression, thermal and polytropic
2 4
efficiency of the compressor, Effect of clearance and volumetric efficiency, multi-
stage compression and its advantages.
CENTRIFUGAL COMPRESSOR: Principle of operation, components of a
centrifugal compressor complete thermodynamics analysis of centrifugal compressor
stage, isentropic and Isothermal efficiencies, work done and pressure rise, Velocity
3 5
vector diagrams for centrifugal compressors and power calculation, pre-guide vanes
and pre-whirl, slip factor, power input factor, degree of reaction and its derivation,
energy transfer in backward, forward and radial vanes.
AXIAL FLOW COMPRESSOR: Component of axial flow compressor and their
arrangement, Principle of operation, velocity vector diagrams, thermodynamics
analysis, and power calculation, Factors affecting stage pressure rise, work done
4 4
factor, Degree of reaction and blade Efficiency and their derivation, Isentropic,
Polytropic, and isothermal efficiencies, Surging, choking and stalling in axial flow
compressors, Characteristics curve for axial flow compressors.
STEAM TURBINES: Introduction, General description of Impulse and Reaction
steam turbines, Impulse Turbine: General description, pressure and velocity
compounding, Velocity diagram and work done, Blade efficiency and overall
5 efficiency Reheat factor and condition curve, Reaction Turbine: Degree of reaction, 8
Velocity diagrams, blade efficiency, and its derivation, Losses in steam turbines,
Stage efficiency, Overall efficiency, and Reheat factor, various types of steam
governing like throttle governing, nozzle control governing and bypass governing.
GAS TURBINES: Introduction, classification of gas turbines based on a system of
operation and based on combustion (at constant volume or constant pressure),
Thermodynamics of constant pressure gas turbine cycle, calculation of net output,
6 work ratio, and thermal efficiency of ideal and actual cycles. 7
Thermal refinements and their effects on the gas turbine cycle, i.e., gas turbine cycle
with regeneration, intercooling and reheating, multistage compression, and
expansion.
NOZZLES AND DIFFUSERS: Types and utility of nozzles, Flow of steam through
nozzles, Effect of friction, Nozzle efficiency, Critical pressure conditions for
7 3
maximum discharge, Supersaturated flow, Classification of diffusers, the effect of
friction and area change, converging-diverging super-sonic diffuser.
CONDENSERS: Introduction, Elements of condensing plants, Brief description of
different types of condensers, Dalton’s law of partial pressure applied to condenser
8 problems, condenser and vacuum efficiencies, Cooling water calculations, Effect of 3
air leakage, Method of checking and preventing air infiltration, Description of air
pump and calculation of its capacity.

No. of
List of Experiments:
Turns
To study the construction and operation of a two-stroke and four-stroke petrol and
1 1
diesel engine
 2 To study the valve timing diagram for a Diesel Engine. 1
To find the Volumetric Efficiency, Brake Thermal Efficiency Mechanical Efficiency,
3 Frictional Power, Indicated Power Heat Balance sheet of Variable Compression Ratio 1
Engine at different Compression Ratios and study its effect on various parameters.
To estimate the Indicated Power, Friction Power, and Mechanical Efficiency of a
4 multi-cylinder Petrol Engine when running at a constant speed under constant settings 1
of a carburetor by cutting the power of one cylinder each in turn (Morse test).
5 To study the Cochran Boiler and its mounting and accessories. 1
6 To study Fraser Boiler and its mounting and accessories. 1
7 To study the thermal power plant and its working. 1
8 To Study two-stage reciprocating compressor. 1
9 To study window-type air conditioners and split air conditioners. 1
To study and draw the vapor compression cycle for a Refrigeration test rig under
10 2
different variables.
To draw the fundamental vapor compression cycle for the window AC test rig and
11 2
calculate its COP and cooling capacity.

Course outcomes: Knowledge Level

By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
Develop problem-solving skills through the application of thermodynamic
1 L2
principles.
Develop a basic understanding of various devices like engines, compressors,
2 L3
turbines, compressors, etc.
Understand the different components of IC Engines through lab-scale
3 L4
experiments.
Optimize the existing thermal system and design newer ones, as per
4 L5
requirements.
5 Propose changes in the existing thermal system and formulate new ones. L6

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 1 1 1 - - - - - - - - 1 -
CO2 3 2 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 -
CO3 3 3 2 2 1 - - - 2 - - - 2 1
CO4 3 3 3 2 1 - 1 - - - - - 3 2
CO5 3 3 3 3 1 - 1 - 1 - - - 3 2

Suggested Books:
Sr. Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Year of
No. Publication/
Reprint
1 Heat Engineering, Vasandani and Kumar, Metropolitan Co. Pvt. Ltd., Delhi. 2013
2 Thermal Engineering, P. L. Ballaney, Khanna Publisher Delhi. 2005
3 Applied Thermodynamics, R. Yadav, Central Publishers, Allahabad. 2011
Applied Thermodynamics for Engineering Technologists, T D Eastop and A
4 2017
McConkey, 5th Ed., Pearson.
5 Basic and Applied Thermodynamics, P.K. Nag, 2nd Ed, Tata McGraw-Hill. 2017
 Course Name : REFRIGERATION AND AIR-CONDITIONING
Course Code : MEN4003
Credits : 4
LT P : 3-1-0

Course Objectives:
1 To understand the basic principles of Refrigeration & Air Conditioning Systems.
To learn the working and understand the construction of the various components of Refrigeration
2
System like evaporators, compressor etc.
3 To design air conditioning system for practical applications.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup Number of
Lectures

REFRIGERATION:
Refrigeration effect, cooling capacity and C.O.P. of a refrigerator, E.P.R. of heat 4
1
pump, Reversed Carnot Cycle
AIR CYCLE REFRIGERATION: ANALYSIS OF BELL COLEMAN CYCLE:
Need of aircraft refrigeration and air conditioning; Analysis of different Air Cycle 4
2
Refrigeration Systems for aircraft.
VAPOUR ABSORPTION REFRIGERATION:
(Only Introduction: No Derivation) Simple vapour absorption refrigeration;
Modifications to simple vapour absorption refrigeration system; Actual vapour 4
3 absorption refrigeration system; Electrolux system; Lithium Bromide; Water
absorption refrigeration system; Solid -Vapour absorption and absorption
refrigeration system.
VAPOUR COMPRESSION REFRIGERATION:
Vapour compression Cycle on P-V, P-H and T-S diagrams; Deviation of actual
Cycle from theoretical one; Mathematical analysis of theoretical and actual vapour 5
4
compression refrigeration cycle; effect of suction pressure, discharge pressure, sub-
cooling, superheating, and pressure drop in valves.
MULTI-PRESSURE VAPOUR COMPRESSION REFRIGERATION:
Single load compound compression with single expansion and water intercooling;
single load compound compression with individual expansion valve and flash
5
intercooling; Multiple load systems with individual expansion valves and individual
5
compressors; Single Load Compound Compression with flash tank and water
intercooling; Single Load Compound with flash chamber as intercooler.
NON-CONVENTIONAL REFRIGERANT SYSTEMS:
Steam Jet Refrigeration; Cascade Refrigeration System; Mixed Refrigeration
4
6 System; Vortex Tube Refrigeration; Thermoelectric Cooling, Modern Air Condition
Systems like HVAC, Variable refrigerant volume (VRV/VRF)
CRYOGENICS:
Definition, Cryogenic fluids, storage and insulation; Linde-Hampson and Claude 4
7
Liquification Cycles (NO ANALYSIS); Adiabatic Demagnetization; Applications.
PSYCHOMETRY:
Definition, Applications; Psychometric properties of air; Dry bulb, wet bulb and dew 4
8 point temperatures; Relative and specific humidity; Enthalpy of air and water
vapours; Human requirements of comfort; Effective temperature.
BASIC PROCESSES IN CONDITIONING OF AIR
Sensible cooling and heating of air; simple humidification and dehumidification of
air concept of bypass factor; cooling and dehumidification; Evaporative cooling; 4
9
chemical dehumidification; air washer.
 LOAD CALCULATIONS AND SUPPLY AIR CONDITIONS:
Sources of heat load; sensible and latent heat load; sensible heat factor; apparatus
dew point temperature; quality and state of supply air for air conditioning of various 4
10
buildings; Load calculations for comfort and cold storage air conditioning.

Sr. Course outcomes: Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
Understand the basic concepts of refrigeration, refrigeration systems, and
1 L2
environmental impact of refrigerants.
Apply the laws of thermodynamics to solve various refrigeration and air
2 L3
conditioning problems.
Analyze and determine the performance of vapor compression cycle under
3 different operating conditions. L4 & L5

4 Understand the principles of non-conventional refrigeration system. L2

Develop understanding of psychometricproperties and chart, determine cooling
5 L6
load and design the air conditioning systems.
CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 1 1 1 - - 1 - - - - 2 1 -
CO2 2 2 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 -
CO3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - - 2 2 1
CO4 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 1 -
CO5 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 2 3 2

Suggested Books:

Sr. Year of Publication/

Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Reprint
No.
1. Refrigeration and Air Conditioning, Jordon and Priester, Prentice Hall of India 2009
2. Principles of Refrigeration, R.J. Dossat, Wiley Eastern 2001
3. Refrigeration and Air Conditioning, C.P. Arora, Tata McGraw Hill 2017
Refrigeration and Air Conditioning, Manohar Prasad, New Age International
4. (Pvt.) 2010
Ltd., Publishers.
5. Refrigeration and Air Conditioning, P.L. Ballaney, Khanna Publishers 2012
6. Refrigeration & Air-conditioning, R. S. Khurmi, S. Chand 2019

Course Name : MECHANICAL VIBRATIONS

Course Code : MEN4004
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-1/2-2/2

Course Objectives: In this course, the student should be able to understand the
1 Causes, sources and the basic principles of mechanical vibrations.
Mechanical Vibration concepts to one, two, multi and infinite degree of freedom systems with
2
different systems components.
3 Concept of numerical methods applicable to study vibration in any engineering system design.
4 Concepts of modal analysis in study of vibrations.
 Total No. of Lectures – 42
Number of
Lecture wise breakup
Lectures
INTRODUCTION: Basic concept of vibration, Importance and scope, definition and
terminology, representation and analysis of harmonic motions, beat phenomenon,
1 work done by a harmonic force on an harmonic motion, Analytical method for Fourier 4
series and Harmonic analysis, introduction to various types of vibrations and types of
excitation.
SINGLE DEGREE OF FREEDOM UNDAMPED FREE VIBRATIONS
SYSTEMS: Derivation of differential equation of motion by D’ Alembert’s principle,
2 Energy method, Rayleigh method, Newton’s second law of motion, Solution of the 4
equation, equivalent spring stiffness of system of springs, Applications of the above
concepts to various problems.
SINGLE DEGREE OF FREEDOM DAMPED FREE VIBRATIONS SYSTEMS:
Introduction to viscous damping, sub-critical, critical and over-damping systems for
3 free vibration and its solutions, logarithmic decrement, frequency of damped 6
oscillations; Dry friction damping and its frequency and rate of decay per cycle,
Concept of eddy current damping, Structural damping and Slip damping.
SINGLE DEGREE OF FREEDOM FORCED VIBRATIONS SYSTEMS:
Various types of forcing function in force vibration, Force vibration analysis with
constant harmonic excitation, rotating & reciprocating unbalance masses, due to
4 7
excitation of the support, Determination of equivalent viscous damping and system
identification from frequency response curve, Vibration isolation and transmissibility,
vibration measuring instruments
TWO DEGREE OF FREEDOM SYSTEMS:
Principal mode of vibration, normal modes, nodes, natural frequencies, mode shapes
for two degree of freedom system having undamped and damped element in it,
5 Application of the above to various systems like torsional vibrations of two rotor 7
systems, strings, double pendulum etc., application of Two degree of freedom in
dynamic vibration absorber and Torsional vibration absorber, centrifugal pendulum
absorber.
MULTI-DEGREE OF FREEDOM SYSTEMS - EXACT ANALYSIS
Undamped free vibrations, Influence coefficients and Maxwell reciprocal theorem,
Matrix Inversion method and determination of eigen values & eigen vectors, torsional
6 7
vibrations of multi rotor system; Continuous systems, vibration of string, longitudinal
vibrations of bar, transverse vibration of beam, torsion of vibrations of circular shaft
under various end conditions.
MULTI-DEGREE OF FREEDOM SYSTEMS - NUMERICAL METHOD
Orthogonal properties of normal modes, Matrix Iteration and determination of all the
eigen values & eigen vectors, Rayleigh methods, Dunkerley method, Stodola method,
7 7
Holzer methods as applied to multi degree of freedom systems and determination of
Eigen-values & Eigen-vectors, characteristic equation and comparison of natural
frequencies by these methods

No. of
List of Experiments:
Turns
1 To determine the mass movement of inertia of a body using trifilar suspension. 1
To determine the periodic time period of undamped torsional vibration of a single rotor
2 1
shaft system.
To determine the stiffness of a helical spring by three different methods and compare the
3 1
results.
To study the damped torsional vibrations and determine the torsional damping
4 1
coefficient.
 To study and determine the periodic time period of free vibration of equivalent spring
5 1
mass system.
To study and determine the periodic time period of force vibration of equivalent spring
6 1
mass system.
7 To determine the natural frequency of cantilever beam using DAQ system. 1

Sr. Course outcomes: Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Understand & apply the concept of Mechanical Vibration in engineering and
L2 & L3
applied sciences problems in general.
2 Apply the concept of Mechanical Vibration to one, two, multi and infinite
L3
degree of freedom systems with different systems components.
3 Evaluate any mechanical system for its dynamic characteristics. L5
4 Develop the dynamic model of real-life problems and determine the natural
L6
frequencies and mode shapes.
5 Compare different numerical and exact techniques to analyze multi- degree
L2 & L4
freedom system.
6 Conduct various tests on machine to assess their dynamic characteristics. L4

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 3 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO2 3 3 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO3 2 3 3 1 - - - - - - - - 2 1
CO4 2 3 3 1 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO5 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - - - 2 1
CO6 1 1 1 3 - - - - 2 2 - 2 3 2

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
1 Mechanical Vibrations, G. K. Grover, Nem Chand & Bros, Roorkee 2009
2 Mechanical Vibrations, S. S. Rao, Pearson Education Inc. 2017
3 Mechanical Vibrations, V. P. Singh, Dhanpat Rai & Sons, Delhi 2020
Theory and Practice of Mechanical Vibrations, J. S. Rao & K. Gupta, New Age
4 2002
International (Pvt.) Ltd., New Delhi
5 Fundamental of Vibration, Balachandran and Magrab, Cengage Learning 2009
6 Mechanical Vibration & Noise Engineering, A. G. Ambekar, PHI 2006
7 Mechanical Vibration, D. Nag Wiley. 2012

Course Name : DYNAMICS OF MACHINES

Course Code : MEN4005
Credits : 4
L-T-P : 3-1/2-2/2

Sr. Course Objectives

No. In this course, the student should be able to:
1. Understand the static and dynamic force analysis to analyse the forces and motions of systems.
2. Understand various types of gears and gear trains.
 Develop knowledge of analytical and graphical methods for calculating balancing of rotary and
3.
reciprocating masses
4. Understand gyroscopic principles and applications in stability and navigation.
Study the various type of governors and their role in maintaining constant engine speeds and system
5.
stability.
Total No. of Lectures - 42
Lectures wise Breakup No. of
Lectures
Static Force Analysis: Constraint and applied forces, Static equilibrium, Equilibrium
1. of two forces and torque, Equilibrium of four forces member, Force convention, Free 5
body diagram, Superposition, Principle of virtual work and Friction mechanisms.
Dynamic Force Analysis: D’Alembert’s principle, Equivalent offset inertia force,
Dynamic analysis of four-link mechanism, Dynamic analysis of slider crank
mechanism, Velocity and acceleration of piston, Angular velocity and angular
2. acceleration of connecting rod, Engine force analysis, Turning moment on the 8
crankshaft, Dynamically equivalent system, Inertia od connecting rod, Inertia force in
reciprocating engines (Graphical method), Turning moment diagram, Fluctuation of
energy, Flywheels, Dimensions of flywheel rims and Punching presses.
Gears: Classification of gears, Gear terminology, Law of gearing, Velocity of sliding,
Forms of teeth, Cycloidal profile teeth, Involute profile teeth, Involute profile teeth,
Path of contact, Arc of contact, Contact ratio, Interference in involute gears, Minimum
3. 5
number of teeth, Undercutting, Comparison of cycloidal involute tooth forms, Helical
and spiral gears, Terminology, of helical gears, Worm and worm gears, Velocity ratio
and centre distance of worm gears, efficiency of worm gears and Bevel gears.
Gear Trains: Simple gear train, Compound Gear train, Reverted gear train, Planetary
4. or epicyclic gear train, Sun and planet gear, Compound epicyclic gear, Automotive 6
transmission gear train and differentials.
Balancing: Static balancing, Dynamic balancing, Transference of a force from one
plane to another, and Balancing of several masses in different planes. Force balancing
5. 8
of linkages, balancing of reciprocating mass, balancing of locomotives, Effects of
partial balancing in locomotives and Secondary balancing, Balancing of Inline engine.
Gyroscope: Angular velocity, Angular acceleration, Gyroscope torque, Gyroscope
6. effect on aeroplanes, Gyroscope effect on naval ships, Stability of automobiles, 5
Stability of two-wheel vehicles and Rigid disc at an angle fixed to a rotating shaft.
Governors: Types of governors, Watt governer (Simple conical governers), Porter
governor, Proell governor, Hartnell governor, Hartung governer, Wilson-Hartnell
7. governer, Pickering governor, Spring-Controlled gravity governor, Inertia governer, 5
Sensitiveness of governor, hunting, Isocronism, Stability, Effort of governer, Power of
governor, and Controlling force.

List of Experiments: No. of

Turns

To find displacement, velocity and acceleration of slider in a single slider crank 1

1
mechanism for different crank angles and draw various graphs.
2 Verify experimentally the gyroscopic couple is given by T = I.ω.ωp 1
3 Draw experimentally the approximate straight line be watts mechanism. 1
Find out the positions of the four weights, so that the system becomes statically & 1
4
dynamically balanced.
 Find the moment of inertia of a given body about an axis passing through C.G. and 1
5 perpendicular to the plane of the body also calculate the minimum oscillation of the
point of suspension.
Balance experimentally as far as possible the known unbalanced force due to a 1
rotating weight by introducing two balancing weights in two different planes
6
(a) Balancing planes on either side of unbalanced force (b) Balancing planes on the
same side of unbalanced force.
Determination of characteristics curve of the Watt, Porter, Proell and Hartnell 1
7
Governors using universal governor set up.

Course outcomes: Knowledge

Sr.
By the end of this course, the student will be able to: Level
No.
(Blooms Level)
Apply the principles of statics and dynamics to analyze mechanisms to determine
1. L3
joint forces and torques.
2. Analyze dynamic force analysis of slider crank mechanism and design of flywheel. L4, L6
3. Analyze and develop gear trains required for various applications. L4
Evaluate the balancing masses and their positions in rotary and reciprocating
4. L5
systems.
Understand gyroscopic principles and their diverse applications in stability and
5. L2 & L3
navigation.
6. Identify and analyze the various types of governors used in engineering systems. L1 & L4
Ability to conduct various tests on machine & mechanism to assess their output
7. L4
characteristics.
CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 3 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO2 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO3 2 3 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO4 1 1 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO5 1 1 1 3 - - - - 2 2 - 1 3 2
CO6 2 3 2 1 - - - - 1 1 - 2 2 3
CO7 2 3 3 2 1 - - - 2 1 - 1 2 2

Suggested Books:
Sr. Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Year of
No. Publication/
Reprint
1. Theory of Machines, V.P. Singh, Dhanpat Rai & Co. Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi. 2014
2. Theory of Machines, P.L. Ballaney, Khanna publishers, New Delhi. 1994
3. Theory of Machines, Shigley, Tata McGraw Hill. 1981
4. Mechanism & Machine Theory, J.S. Rao & R.V. Dukhipati, Wiley Eastren Ltd. 1992
5. Theory of Mechanisms, Amitabh Gosh & A.K. Mallik, East West Press Machines 2006
Private Ltd.
6. Theory of Machines, S. S. Rattan, McGraw Hill Education (India) 2019
Course Name : PRODUCTION & OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT
Course Code : MEN5001
Credits : 3
L T P : 3-0-0

Course Objectives:
To impart the knowledge on the concept and significance of Production Management and Capacity
1.
planning.
To impart the knowledge on the plant layout design heuristics/algorithms and applications of
2.
forecasting techniques.
3. To impart the knowledge on the Scheduling and Inventory control methods.
To impart the knowledge on applications of PERT and CPM techniques and concepts of Reliability
4.
and maintenance.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
lectures
INTRODUCTION TO PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT:
1 Types of Production Systems, Product Design and development, Standardization and 5
simplification, Make-buy decision, Concurrent Engineering and SCM.
PLANT LOCATION & LAYOUT:
Mathematical Models for single facility location, Euclidean and Rectilinear methods
2 6
and Minimum location problem, Layout Design Heuristics/algorithms: CRAFT,
ALDEP and CORELAP, Types of layouts
FORECASTING:
Time Series Analysis: Correlation and regression, Exponential Smoothing,
3 6
Decomposition algorithm for seasonal data, Measuring and analysis of forecasting
accuracy.
PLANT CAPACITY AND SCHEDULING:
4 Plant capacity and capacity planning strategies, Scheduling and sequencing techniques 6
in job and mass production.
MATERIALS MANAGEMENT AND INVENTORY CONTROL:
5 Methods, Principles and Need of Inventory control, EOQ Probabilistic and 6
deterministic models, Materials Requirement Planning and MRP-II.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT:
6 PERT and CPM networks, Critical Activities and floats, Crashing of activities. Project 6
scheduling with resource constraints.
Maintenance Planning and Control:
Types of Maintenance: Planned and quality Maintenance, Reliability centred
7 7
maintenance, Predictive and proactive maintenance, Reliability and availability of
systems, Reliability improvement.

Course outcomes: By the end of this course, the student will be able to: Knowledge Level
(Blooms Level)
Understand and illustrate the plant layouts using Design Heuristics
1. L2
Apply the concepts of Production management and Capacity planning in
2. L3
industries
3. Analyze the forecasting techniques used in industries and service sectors L4
4. Apply the Scheduling and sequencing techniques in job shops. L3
5. Analyze the various inventory models in industries. L4
Recommend the different Project management techniques applicable in
6. L5
projects and understand the concepts of Maintenance methods in industries.
CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO2 2 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - 2 2 2
CO3 2 2 3 2 - - - - - - - 1 3 2
CO4 2 1 2 1 - - - - - - - 2 2 1
CO5 1 1 2 1 - - - - 2 2 - 1 3 3
CO6 2 3 3 1 - - - - 2 2 3 3 3 3

Suggested Books:
Sr. Year of
No. Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
Reprint
1 Modern Production/Operation Management, Buffa and Sarin, John Wiley and Sons 2011
2 Operations Research - An Introduction, H. A. Taha, Pearson Publications 2010
3 Operations Management, P. B. Mahapatra, PHI Publication 2015
4 Operation Research, Gupta and Hira, S. Chand Publication, Delhi 2015
5 Production & Operations Management, Surya Prakash Singh, Vikas Publishing
2018
House Pvt. Ltd., Noida

Course Name : HEAT AND MASS TRANSFER

Course Code : MEN5002
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-0-2

Course Objectives:
To understand the fundamental principles and laws of heat transfer and explore the implications of
1
these principles.
To formulate the models necessary to study, analyze and design heat transfer systems through the
2
application of these principles.
3 To develop the problem-solving skills and practice of heat transfer in real-world applications.
Total No. of Lectures –42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
CONDUCTION HEAT TRANSFER: Conduction, Convection, and Radiation Heat
Transfer, Steady-State one, two and multi-Dimensional heat Conduction: Plane Wall,
Insulation and R values, Radial Systems, Heat-Transfer Coefficient, Critical Thickness of
1 10
Insulation, Heat-Source Systems, Thermal Contact Resistance, Conduction-Convection
System Fins with uniform cross-sections, Lumped-Heat-Capacity System, Transient Heat
Flow in a Semi-Infinite Solid.
PRINCIPLES OF CONVECTION: Viscous Flow, Inviscid Flow, Laminar Boundary
Layer on a Flat Plate, Energy Equation of the Boundary Layer, Thermal Boundary Layer,
Relation between Fluid Friction and Heat Transfer, Turbulent-Boundary-Layer Heat
2 8
Transfer, Turbulent Flow in a Tube, Empirical and Practical Relations for Forced-
Convection Heat Transfer. Empirical Relations for Pipe and Tube Flow, Liquid-Metal
Heat Transfer.
NATURAL CONVECTION SYSTEMS: Free-Convection: Heat Transfer on a Vertical
3 Flat Plate, Empirical Relations, Vertical planes and Cylinders, Horizontal Cylinders, 2
Plates, Inclined Surfaces, Spheres.
 RADIATION HEAT TRANSFER: Physical Mechanism, Radiation Properties/laws,
Shape Factor and their relations, Heat exchange between non-black bodies, Infinite
4 8
Parallel Planes, cylinders, spheres, Radiation shields. Solar radiation, Effect of Radiation
on Temperature Measurement.
BOILING AND CONDENSATION: Boiling types, mechanism, Pool Boiling: Nucleate
5 Boiling, CHF Flow Boiling: Plug/Slug flow, types, Mechanism Film-wise / Drop wise 4
Condensation
HEAT EXCHANGERS: Introduction, Analysis of Heat Exchangers: LMTD for parallel
6 flow HX, LMTD for counter Flow HX, Effectiveness for parallel Flow /Counter Flow 6
HX, Some Important Topics from current research.
MASS TRANSFER: Velocities and mass fluxes, Governing equations of mass transfer:
7 Species mass balance, Heat and mass transfer analogy, Impermeable surface model, Mass 4
transfer driven flows, Convective mass transfer.

List of Experiments: No. of

Turns
1. To determine thermal conductivity of metal rod (Al, Brass and Steel) 1
2. To determine thermal conductivity of insulting metal. 1
3. To determine thermal conductivity of composite wall. 1
4. To determine thermal conductance of heat pipe & compare it with other metal rods. 1
5. To determine heat- transfer coefficient in natural convection 1
6. To study heat transfer from a pin-fin in natural & forced convection mode. 2
7. To determine heat - transfer coefficient in forced convection. 1
8. To find heat transfer coefficient for drop-wise and film-wise condensation process 1
9. Study of CHF & pool-boiling. 1
10. To determine effectiveness of parallel/counter flow heat exchange. 1
11. To determine Stefan Boltzmann constant of radiation heat transfer. 2
12. To determine the emissivity of a non-black surface. 1

Course outcomes: By the end of this course, the student will be able to:
1 Apply basic concepts of heat transfer.
2 Develop problem-solving skills of heat transfer devices.
3 Apply scientific and engineering principles to analyze and design thermal systems.
4 Ability to understand and design the various mass transfer operations.

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 1 2 2 - - - - 1 - - 2 2 2
CO2 3 3 2 1 - - - - 2 - - 2 2 3
CO3 3 3 1 2 - - - - 2 - - 2 2 3
CO4 3 2 2 3 - - - - 2 - - 3 2 2

Suggested Books:
Sr. Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Year of
No. Publication/
Reprint
1 Engineering Heat Transfer, R.C. Sachdeva, New Age 2012
2 Fundamentals of Heat and Mass Transfer, Incropera, Dewitt, Wiley India Edition. 1997
3 Heat Transfer, J.P. Holman, Mc Graw Hill 2014
4 Engineering Heat and Mass Transfer, M.M. Rathor, University Science Press 2015
5 Fundamentals of Heat & Mass Transfer, C. P. Kothandaraman, New Age 2012
6 A text Book of Heat & Mass Transfer by D.S. Kumar, S.K. Kataria & Sons 2016
Course Name : DESIGN OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
Course Code : MEN5003
Credits : 3
L T P : 3-0-0

Course Objectives: In this course, the student should be able to

1. Understand the mechanical systems consisting of wide range of machine elements.
2. Understand the design procedure representing empirical, semi-empirical and analytical approaches.
3. Design and analyze a real engineering system.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
GENERAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS: Scope and meaning of design with
special reference to machine design, design processes, Concept of tearing, bearing,
1 shearing, crushing, bending, etc. Selection of materials, Factors of safety under 5
different loading conditions, stress-concentration factors, Design stresses for variable
and repeated loads. Endurance limit and strength, Fits, tolerances and surface finish.
FASTENERS:Screws, bolts, preloaded bolts, uniform strength screws, bolts subjected
2 to shear, tension and torque, eccentrically loaded bolted joints. Welded and riveted 5
connection, eccentrically loaded welded and riveted connections.
SHAFTS AND AXLES: Review of torsional equation for circular shafts, Design of
3 circular shafts subjected to axial, bending and torsional loading and its combinations 4
under different theory of failures.
DESIGN OF FLEXIBLE MACHINE ELEMENTS: Belts (Flat & V), types of
drives and orientations of driving & driven shaft covered by flat and V belts along with
design of belts, pulleys, keys & shafts. Types of V-belts, their power ratings & design
4 6
thereof, Concept and application of timing belt. Chains- roller chains, their designation
by IS, designing w.r.t. sagging, centrifugal & transmittal loads, Complete sizing of
sprockets.
BEARINGS: Types of bearings, Selection of a sliding and Rolling Bearings, Design of
Journal Bearing: Somerfield number, bearing modulus, material for journal bearing,
types of lubricants, their designated numbers. Concept of bearing body, oil &
environment temperatures, Calculation of heat generation and dissipation, Design of
5 6
bearing cap & bolts, Design of Rolling Contact Bearings: their designation w.r.t. duty,
type & diameter, Concepts of catalogue, average and rating life, Bearings subjected to
different loads for different time during one cycle and their equivalent dynamic load
carrying capacity.
DESIGN OF CLUTCHES & BRAKES: Design of Clutches: Axial and Radial
friction clutches, clutch load characteristics, mechanical (friction) clutches, design for
6 uniform wear & pressure theories, Centrifugal clutches design, Brakes: Design of 6
single & double block brakes, Concepts of self-locking brakes, Design of External &
Internal shoe brakes, Band Brakes and Band & Block brakes.
DESIGN OF GEAR DRIVES: Factors influencing the choice of a gear, Design
Details of Spur, Helical, worm and bevel gears, Nomenclature & designing of all these
7 gears from basics of tooth loading as done by Lewis and checks for dynamic loading 10
by Buckingham equations, beam strength, Wear load calculations and design of shafts
for all these gears.

Sr. Course outcomes: Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Understand the basic causes of failure. L2
2 Select the suitable materials, fits, tolerances and surface finish considering L5
manufacturing aspects.
 3 Analyze stresses involved with static, dynamic and fatigue loading acting on L4
a mechanical system.
4 Apply the causes of failure in designing/sizing of mechanical components. L3, L6
5 Design a mechanical system with special focus on power transmission. L6

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 2 - - 1 1 - - - - - 2 3 1
CO2 3 3 2 2 1 - 2 - - - - 2 3 1
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 - 1 - - - - 1 3 2
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 - - - - 1 3 2
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 - - - - 2 3 2

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
Mechanical Engineering Design, Shingle, J.E. Shigley & Charles R. Mischke, 6th ed.,
1 2003
Tata McGraw Hill.
A Text Book of Machine Design, P.C.Sharma & D.K.Aggarwal,12th ed., S.K.Kataria
2 2012
& Sons, New Delhi
3 Machine Design, Robert L Norton, Pearson. 2012
Fundamentals of Machine Component Design, Robert C. Juvinall & Kurt M. Marshek,
4 2000
3rd ed., John Wiley & Sons.
5 Design of Machine Elements, V.B. Bhandari, 5th edition, Tata Mc Graw Hill 2020

Course Name : MECHANICAL MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL

Course Code : MEN5004
Credits : 3
LTP : 3-0-0

Course Objectives: At the end of the course, the student will be able to:
1 Understand the significance of calibration, traceability and uncertainty.
2 Understand the principles of mathematical modeling within the realm of control systems.
3 Understand the measurement inaccuracies and strategies for reducing these errors.
4 Have a clear concept about the control systems across various time domains.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
No. of
Lecture wise breakup
Lectures
INTRODUCTION:
Significance of measurements, Objectives, Classification of measurements, Static and
Dynamic Characteristics of Instruments, Calibration, Accuracy, precision, &
1. 6
repeatability, Types of errors, Effect of component errors, Tolerance analysis in
manufacturing and assembly, Limits, fits and tolerances, design principles for limit
gauges, Types and tolerance of limit gauges, Taylor’s principle for gauges.

MEASUREMENT OF DISPLACEMENT, STRAIN & ACCELERATION:

Theory of Strain Gauges, gauge factor, temperature Compensation, Bridge circuit,
2. 5
Transducers for displacement, displacement measurement, potentiometer, LVDT,
Accelerometer and vibrometers, practical accelerometers.
 MEASUREMENT OF FLOW, PRESSURE & TEMPERATURE:
Elastic pressure transducers, piezoelectric pressure sensors, High Pressure
3. Measurements, Bridge man gauge, Vacuum gauges, Bernoulli flowmeters, Ultrasonic 6
Flowmeter, Thermal Mass Flow Measurement, Positive Displacement Flow meter,
Electro-magnetic and Ultrasonic Flow meter.
SURFACE ROUGHNESS MEASUREMENT, SCREW THREAD & GEAR
METROLOGY: Surface Roughness Measurement Methods, Contact and Non-
Contact type roughness measuring devices, 3D & Nano Level Roughness
4. Measurement, Texture analysis, Elements of screw thread, Measurements of pitch and 7
screw thread angle, and minor, major, effective diameters, elements of gear
metrology, measurement of gear tooth thickness, gear profile, gear concentricity, pitch
and run-out for involute gear.
MEASUREMENT OF FORCE, TORQUE AND POWER:
Introduction, Applications, Elastic force meters, Smart and Intelligent load cells,
5. 5
Torsion meters, Optical Torque Measurement, Digital and analogue tachometer, fiber
optic gyroscope, Dynamometers.
GAUGING INSTRUMENTS, FORM ERRORS AND INTERFEROMETERY:
Design principles of measuring instruments, Linear and angular measurements,
Vernier calipers, Micro-meters dial gauges, Bevel protectors, Sine bar, Spirit level,
6. Optical instruments: autocollimators, tool room microscope length measuring 8
machines, Various types of comparators, Straightness, Flatness, Alignment Errors,
Computational techniques in measurement of form errors, Principle of light
interference, Interferometers, Laser Interferometry.
INTRODUCTION TO CONTROL SYSTEM:
Introduction to control systems, Classification of control system, Open loop and
7. closed loop systems, Mathematical modelling of control systems, Transfer Function 5
methodology, Block diagram algebra, Introduction to PI, PD, PID controllers,
Adaptive control system.

Knowledge
Sr. Course outcomes:
Level
No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to:
(Blooms Level)
Recognizing and choosing the appropriate measuring instrument for a given
1 L1
application.
Categorize the diverse static characteristics and identify the types of errors that
2 L2
manifest within the system.
Categorize and opt for the suitable measuring device for pressure temperature,
3 L2
flow and strain measurement assessments.
Examine measurement errors and distinguish between different types of
4 L5
control systems while also understanding various time domain specifications.
Create a mathematical model for a system or process that can generate
5 L6
standard input responses.

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO PO PO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PSO1 PSO2
10 11 12
CO1 3 2 1 2 - - - - - - - 2 3 3
CO2 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 2 2 3
CO3 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - 1 2 3 3
CO4 3 2 1 1 - - - - - - 1 1 2 2
CO5 2 3 2 2 - - - - - - 2 2 2 2
Suggested Books:
Sr. Year of
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publications/
No. Reprint

1 Measurement Systems: Applications and Design, by EO Doebelin, 5th Edition, 2008

McGraw Hill.
2 Instrumentation and Control System, W. Bolton, Elsevier. 2021

3 Mechanical Engineering Measurements, A K Sawhney, Dhanpat Rai& Sons, New 2005

Delhi.
4 Control System Engineering by Nagrath IJ and Gopal M, Wiley Eastern, Ltd. 2018

5 Mechanical Measurements and Control, by D S Kumar, Metropolitan Book Co. 2015

Pvt. Ltd.

Course Name : CAD/CAM

Course Code : MEN5005/MEO1003
Credits : 3
LT P : 3-0-0

Course Objectives:
To provide the basic analytical fundamentals those are used to create and manipulate geometric
1
models in a computer program.
2 To familiar the student different aspects of computer aided manufacturing.
Total No. of Lectures –42
Lecture wise breakup No. of Lectures
Fundamentals of CAD
Introduction, Design Process, Application of computers in design, Creating
1. 7
manufacturing database, benefits of CAD, Software configuration of a graphics
system, functions of a graphics package, coordinate systems.
Geometric Transformations
Mathematics preliminaries, matrix representation of 2 and 3 dimensional
2. transformations, scaling, mirror, translation, orthographic, perspective 7
transformations, Homogeneous transformations, Concatenation of transformation
matrices.
Geometric modeling of curves
Need of Geometric Modeling, types of geometric modeling, geometric modeling
3. representation, and geometric modeling techniques and uses, parametric 6
representation of analytical curves line, circle, ellipse, conics and synthetic curves,
Hermite curve, Bezier curve, B spline curve.
Modelling of Surfaces and Solids
4. Parametric representation of surfaces, plane, surface of revolution, offset surface, 6
ruled surface, Solid modeling, CSG and Boundary Representation
CIM
Types of CIM systems, CAD-CAM link for CIMS, FMS and its types, FMS layouts,
5. 8
Automated material handling systems, equipment and their functions, automated
guided vehicle navigation system, Automatic Storage and Retrieval Systems (AS/RS).
Computer Aided Process Planning
6. Introduction and benefits of CAPP, types of CAPP, Steps in variant process planning, 8
planning for CAPP, machinability data selection systems in CAPP.
 Sr. Course outcomes: Knowledge Level
No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
Students will be able to describe the principles of Computer Aided
1 Designing systems and the concepts of Geometric transformations and L1
modelling.
Students will be able to do mathematical representation of different curves,
2 L3, L4
surfaces and solids.
3 Students will able to know about group technology & CIM Systems. L2
4 Students will able to know about Computer Aided Process Planning. L2, L3

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO PO1 PSO PSO
PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11
1 2 1 2
CO1 3 2 1 2 - - - - - - - 2 3 3
CO2 3 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 2 3 3
CO3 3 1 1 1 - - - - - - 1 2 2 3
CO4 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - 1 2 2 3

Suggested Books:
Sr. Year of Publication/
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher
No. Reprint
Zimmer, E.W. and Groover, M.P., CAD/CAM – Computer Aided Designing
1. 2008
and Manufacturing, Dorling Kingsley (2008).
2. Zeid, I. CAD/ CAM Theory and Practice. McGraw Hill. 2009 2009
Bedworth, D.D., Henderson, M.R. & Wolfe, P.M. Computer Integrated
3. 1991
Design and Manufacturing. New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill. 1991
Mikell P. Groover, Automation, Production Systems, and Computer-integrated
4. 2007
Manufacturing, prentice Hall, 2007
5. YoramKoren, Computer control of manufacturing system, 1st edition, 2005 2005
Rogers, D. and Edams, Mathematical Elements For Computer Graphics, Mc
6. 2017
Graw Hill, 2017.
7. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112102102/, http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112102103/
Open Elective Courses
Course Name : WORK STATION DESIGN AND NEURO-ERGONOMICS
Course Code : MEO1001/MEE1018
Credits : 4
L T P : 310

Course Objectives:
This course is designed to teach the fundamentals of Designing of Ergonomically correct Work
1
Stations
To study latest techniques used in the evaluation of human work in all contexts that leads
2 systematically to the investigation of all the factors which affect the efficiency and economy of human
energy at the work place
It helps in designing and improvement in the methods and procedures which are most effective,
3
require the least efforts and are the best suited to the industrial workers.

Total No. of Lectures – 42

S. Contents No. of
No. Lectures
WORK STUDY FUNDAMENTALS: Definitions, Scope and applications,
1 Productivity and Work Study, Analysis of Work Content, Introduction to Industrial 3
Engineering and Productivity, Measurement tools of productivity.
METHOD STUDY: Process Analysis, Process and Activity Charts, Operation
2 5
Analysis, Basic Procedure, Micro Motion Study, Principles of Motion Economy.
WORK MEASUREMENT: Purposes and Uses, Basic Procedure, Techniques:
Work Sampling, Rating and Allowances, Setting Standard Times for Jobs, Standard
3 8
Data, Predetermined Motion Time Systems, MTM, Work factor and MOST, Job
Evaluation of Merit Rating, Wage Incentive Plans.
ERGONOMICS AND RISK ASSESSMENT: Concepts, Issues in Work System
Design, Measuring Work by Physiological Means, Work Posture, Fatigue
4 Measurement & Evaluation, Work Systems, Limitation of Man & Machine with 8
respect to each other by risk assessment techniques such as RULA, REBA, OCRA,
NIOSH, SI, PLIBEL, QEC and OWAS.
WORK LOAD MEASUREMENT: Human Motor Activity, Anatomy of human
muscles and brain lobes, Metabolism, Physical and Mental Work load and their
Measurement, Introduction to work related musculoskeletal disorders and mental
5 fatigue, Introduction to Neuro-ergonomics and quantification of neuro-signals from 10
electro-encephalography and electromyography by linear and non-linear techniques
with respect to work duration and rest periods, Introduction to Digital Human
Modelling Techniques.
CLIMATES AND NOISE EVALUATION: Heat Humidity: Body heat Balance,
Effective Temperature Scales, Zones of Discomfort, Effects of Heat on Body and
Work Performance, Vibration: Response of Body to Low Frequency Vibration,
Vibrations and Discomfort, Effect on Health of Worker, Effect of High Frequency
6 8
Vibrations, Methods of Reducing Vibrations, Analysis, Noise: Physiological Effects
of Noise, Annoyance of Noise, Speed Interference, Hearing Loss, Temporary and
Permanent Threshold Shift, Effect of Noise on Performance, Reduction of Noise,
Personal Noise Protection.

Knowledge
Level
Course outcomes: By the end of this course, the student will be able to:
(Blooms
Level)
Assess all industrial activities with respect to motion study and there by design work
1 L5 & L6
stations.
 Quantification of physical and mental work load of the workers by latest neurological
2 L5
techniques.
3 Identify and assess the environmental and climatic working conditions in industry. L2 & L5
Analyze and apply different risk assessment techniques to predict risk involved in work
4 L3 & L4
with respect to development of musculoskeletal disorders.
Application of all latest time study techniques to calculate standard time to carry-out any
5 L3
industrial job.
CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 3 3 3 1 2 - - - - 1 1 2 1
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - 1 1 2 1
CO3 2 3 3 2 - 2 2 - - - 1 1 1 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 - 2 - - - - 1 1 2 1
CO5 3 3 2 3 - - - - - - 1 1 1 1

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
Motion and Time Study, Design and Measurement of Work, Ralph M. Barnes,
1 2009
Wiley India.
2 Neuro-Ergonomics, Raja Parasuraman & Mathew Rizzo, Oxford University Press. 2007
Handbook of Digital Human Modelling, Vincent G. Duffy, CRC Press Taylor &
3 2009
Francis Group.
Ergonomics Laboratory Exercises, Timothy Joseph Gallwey & Leonard William O’
4 2010
Sullivan, CRC Press Taylor & Francis Group.
International Standard Manual of Ergonomics, Part-1: Lifting and Carrying; Part-2:
5 2009
Pushing and Pulling, Part-3: Handling of Low Loads at High Frequency.
6 Neuroergonomics: Principles and Practice, Chang S. Nam, Springer 2020

Course Name : HYDRAULIC AND PNEUMATIC CONTROL DESIGN

Course Code : MEO1002/MEE1016
Credits : 4
LT P : 3-1-0

Course Objectives:
1 To provide an insight into the capabilities of hydraulic and pneumatic fluid power.
To understand the concepts and relationships surrounding force, pressure, energy and power in fluid
2
power systems.
To examine concepts centering on sources of hydraulic power, rotary and linear actuators, distribution
3
systems, hydraulic flow in pipes, and control components in fluid power systems.
To provide the exposure to build and interpret hydraulic and pneumatic circuits related to industrial
4
applications.
5 To familiarize with logic controls and trouble shooting.
 Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
BASIC PNEUMATIC AND HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS: Introduction and basic
elements of fluid power system, their structure, advantages and limitation, Applications
of fluid power, pneumatic vs hydraulics control systems, Properties of fluids for
1. hydraulic systems and governing laws, review of pneumatics in distribution of fluid 5
power, Structure and signal flow of hydraulic and pneumatic system, Basic types and
constructions of hydraulic pumps, motors and compressors, Air generation and
distribution, Processing elements, Power components.
FLUID ACCESSORIES: Air receiver, after-cooler, Air Dryer, Air Filter, Pressure
Regulator, Air Lubricator, Air Service Unit, Pipeline layout, Seals, Hydraulic fluids,
2. 5
Hydraulic reservoir, Hydraulic filter, Hydraulic Accumulator, Intensifier, Pressure
gauges and Volume Meters, Lines, Fitting and Connectors, Hydraulic seals.
ACTUATORS AND OUTPUT DEVICES: Cylinders, Classification of cylinders on
the basis of construction, Single and Double acting cylinders, their types, Classification
of cylinders on the basis of working Medium: hydraulic and Pneumatic, rod-less
cylinders, Cylinder construction, mounting arrangement Construction and working of
3. 5
rotary actuators such as gear, vane, piston and hydraulic motors. Theoretical torque,
power, flow-rate, hydraulic motor performance, Symbolic representation of actuators
(cylinders and motors), Cylinder performance characteristics, Symbols of Motors,
Classification of fluid motors.
CONTROL ELEMENTS: Classification of the valves, Direction Control valves,
Poppet valves, Function of a 3/2-way NC and NO poppet valve, Manual and
Mechanical operation of poppet valves, Mini poppet valves, 3/2-way and 5/2-way spool
valves, Manual and mechanical operating devices for spool valves, Pneumatic operating
devices for the valves , Directly operated solenoid valves , Servo solenoid valves with
4. 8
internal pilot and external pilot, Three-position valves, Blocking valves: Unidirectional,
bidirectional, Signal processing valves, Nominal flow rate, Sizing of directional control
distribution valves and connecting tubes, Interception valves, Non return, Flow and
Pressure valves, Valve combination, Quick exhaust valve, Time delay Valve/Air Timer,
Pneumatic Logic Valves, Twin Pressure valve, Shuttle Valve, Symbolic representation.
DESIGN OF HYDRAULIC CONTROL CIRCUIT: Symbols and description of
components, Rules for designing circuits, Control chain, design of circuit diagram,
circuit layout, designation of individual elements, Single or semi-automatic cycle,
Continuous or automatic cycle, Elementary circuits, Signals generated by limit switches,
Hydraulic circuit for control of single acting and double acting cylinder, Speed control
5. in hydraulic circuits, Bleed of circuit, Regenerative circuit, Sequencing circuit, 6
hydraulic circuit for force multiplication, speed control of hydraulic cylinder- metering
in, metering out and bleed off circuits, Pilot pressure operated circuits, Hydraulic circuit
with accumulator, counter balance valve application, Memory valves, Timer, Cycle start
command, Single and continuous cycle, Emergency
command pressure reduction circuit, problems in circuit design.
DESIGN OF PNEUMATIC CONTROL CIRCUIT: Pneumatic Circuits for control
of single acting and double acting cylinder, Simple Pneumatic Control: Direct and
indirect actuation pneumatic cylinders, speed control of cylinders, supply air and
exhaust air throttling, Circuit with mechanical feedback, Use of flow control valve and
Quick exhaust valve, Time delay circuit, Circuit with necessary conditions, Application
6. 7
of Twin pressure and Shuttle valve, Signal Processing Elements: Use of Logic gates,
OR and AND gates in pneumatic application, Practical examples involving the use of
logic gates, Electro-Pneumatic Control: Principles, signal input
and output, pilot assisted solenoid control of directional control valves, use of relay and
contactors, Control circuitry for simple signal cylinder application.
 CONTROL SYSTEMS: Open and closed loop control system, Selection and
comparison of working and control media, Control Theory, Control system
7. development: Positional sketch, Displacement, step diagram, Control Chart, Function 6
Diagram, Function chart, Circuit diagram, Cascade Design, Steps involved in cascade
design, Sign Conventions, Development aspects, Emergency control.

Sr. Course outcomes: Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Recall basic elements of fluid mechanics and logic gates L1
Identify and analyze the functional requirements of a fluid power
2 L2 & L4
transmission system for a given application.
Understand the working of hydraulic/pneumatic circuit to accomplish the
3 L2
desired function.
Design an appropriate hydraulic/pneumatic/combination circuit like electro-
4 L6
hydraulics, electro-pneumatics for a given application.
5 Select and standardize the different components of the circuit. L5
6 Apply the control systems development techniques in industrial applications. L3
CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 1 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO2 2 3 3 2 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO3 3 3 2 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO6 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 1

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
1 Fundamentals of Fluid Power Control, John Watton, Cambridge University press. 2012
2 Hydraulics and Pneumatics, Andrew Par, Jaico Publishing House. 2005
3 Fluid Power with Applications, Anthony Esposito, Pearson. 2000
4 Introduction to Fluid Power, Thomson, Prentice Hall. 2004
Pneumatic systems – Principles and Maintenance, Majumdar S.R., Tata Mc-Graw
5 2005
Hill, New Delhi.
6 Oil Hydraulics, S. R. Majumdar, Tata Mc-Graw Hill. 2017

Course Name : AUTOMOTIVE ENGINEERING

Course Code : ME01004/MEE1017
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-0-2

Course Objectives:
1 To develop an understanding of all the sub-components of an automotive vehicle.
2 To give knowledge about all the controlling and electronic components.
3 To gain the knowledge about new technologies being used in automotive vehicles.
Total No. of Lectures – 42

Lecture wise breakup No. of

Lectures
INTRODUCTION: History of Automotive engineering, Classification of
Automotive vehicles, Different sub-systems in automotive vehicles, History of hybrid
1 2
electric, electric and fuel cell vehicles, social and environmental importance of hybrid
electric, electric and fuel cell vehicles.
COOLING AND LUBRICATION SYSTEMS: Cooling systems and its
components for conventional and EV, anti-freeze mixtures. Lubrication purpose and
2 various systems of lubrication, types and desirable properties of lubricants, 5
components like oil filters, oil pumps, and oil pressure indicators, air supply system,
air filters, turbo charger and super charger.
FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEMS: Fuel injection system for petrol and diesel engines,
fuel pumps (mechanical and electrical), air fuel ratio requirements, carburetors: types
3 5
and general operation throttle body and multipoint fuel injection systems, electronic
control module and sensing devices.
TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS: Clutch function and types, torque converters; fluid
flywheel; manual and automatic transmission/ trans axles; constant mesh & synchro-
mesh gearboxes, epi-cyclic gearbox, differential, propeller shafts and universal joint
front and rear axles.
Basic concept of electric traction and architecture, Topologies for electric drive-train
4 and their analysis, Drive cycle implications and fuel efficiency estimations and well 4
to wheel fuel efficiency analysis, Sizing of components for different electric drive
train topologies.
Matching the electric drive and ICE, Transmission selection and gear step selection,
Sizing the propulsion motor, its torque, constant power speed ratio and machine
dimensions,
BRAKE SYSTEMS, WHEEL & TYRES: Braking efficiency and stopping
distances. Types of brakes, Drum and disc brakes. Detailed description of hydraulic
5 and pneumatic brake. Mechanical, vacuum and electrical methods of brake actuation, 5
servo brakes, ABS, type of wheels, tyres, type of tyres; cross ply, radial tubeless etc.
specification of tyres, Supporting system for EV braking system
SUSPENSION SYSTEM: Road springs, shock absorbers, independent suspension,
6 4
road springs, air suspension, hydro-elastic suspension.
STEERING SYSTEM: Steering geometry, details, correct steering angle, Ackerman
steering mechanism. Cornering power, over steering and under steering. Worm wheel
7 5
and Rack pinion types of steering gears. Safety steering columns, power steering,
Supporting system for EV steering system.
IGNITION SYSTEM: Various ignition systems ( coil and magneto) and detailed
8 4
study of their components, electronic ignition system, distributor less ignition system
ENERGY STORAGE SYSTEM: Storage battery (lead acid type), Maintenance free
batteries, various components, Charging system, Li-ion battery based energy storage
9 and simplified models of battery, Fuel cells, their characteristics and simplified 4
models, Super capacitor based energy storage, its analysis and simplified models, its
advantages and challenges.
EMISSION CONTROL AND ACCESSORIES: Emission norm like EURO and
BHARAT norms, methods and devices to control emissions; Automotive accessories,
10 4
controlling devices such as fuel gauge, temperature gauge, indicator lights
speedometer odometer, HVAC etc.

List of Experiments No. of Turns

To study and prepare report on the constructional details, working principles and 2
1 operation of the Automotive Engine Systems & Sub Systems.
 To study and prepare report on the constructional details, working principles and 1
2 operation of the Fuels supply systems.
To study and prepare report on the constructional details, working principles and 1
3
operation of the conventional and EV Clutches.
To study and prepare report on the constructional details, working principles and 2
4 operation of the conventional and EV Transmission systems.
To study and prepare report on the constructional details, working principles and 2
5
operation of the conventional and EV Drive Lines & Differentials.
To study and prepare report on the constructional details, working principles and 1
6
operation of the conventional and EV Suspension Systems.
To study and prepare report on the constructional details, working principles and 2
7
operation of the conventional and EV Steering Systems.
To study and prepare report on the constructional details, working principles and 1
8
operation of the conventional and EV Tyres & wheels.
To study and prepare report on the constructional details, working principles and 1
9
operation of the conventional and EV Brake systems.
To study and prepare report on the constructional details, working principles and 1
10
operation of conventional Automotive Emission / Pollution control systems.

Sr. Course outcomes: Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
Realize the need and importance of study of automobile engineering for L4
1
mechanical engineers.
Identify and compare the relative merits, demerits and applications of different L3, L4
2
systems and components in an Automobile.
Explain working of IC engines (Gasoline and Diesel) and various parameters L5
3
related to it.
Classify and illustrate various elements of Automobile like, Transmission, L2, L4
4
Brakes, Suspension, and Steering etc.
Explain recent advancements in field of Automobile engineering, like, Electric L2
5
Vehicles, Hybrid Vehicles, CRDI engines, ABS etc.
Explain and illustrate various emission and safety regulations along with their L5
6
importance in automobile engineering.
CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 1 2 - - - - - - - - 2 1 1
CO2 3 1 2 - - - - - - - - 2 2 2
CO3 3 1 2 - - - - - - - - 2 1 1
CO4 3 1 2 - - - - - - - - 2 2 1
CO5 3 1 2 - - - - - - - - 2 2 2
CO6 3 1 1 - - 3 - - - - - 2 1 2

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
Automobile Engg., Kirpal Singh, Standard Publication distributors, Delhi Vol. I & 2020
1
Vol. II
Encyclopaedia of Automotive Engineering, D. Crolla, D. E. Foster, T. Kobayashi and 2015
2
N. Vaughan (Editors-in-Chief), Parts 1-6, Wiley
3 Automotive Engineering Fundamentals, R. Stone and J. K. Ball, SAE International. 2004
 The Motor Vehicle, T. K. Garrett, K. Newton, and W. Steeds, 13th ed., SAE 2001
4
International.
5 Internal Combustion Engines, V. Ganesan, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill. 2017
Modern Electric, Hybrid Electric and Fuel Cell Vehicles: Fundamentals, Theory and 2010
6
Design, M. Ehsani, Y. Gao and A. Emadi, 2nd Edition, CRC Press.
Car Suspension and Handling, D. B. Astow, G. Howard and J. P. Whitehead, 4th ed., 2004
7
SAE International.
8 James Larminie, John Lowry, Electric Vehicle Technology Explained, Wiley 2012

Course Name : CAD/CAM

Course Code : MEO1003/MEN5005
Credits : 4
LT P : 3-1-0

Course Objectives:
To provide the basic analytical fundamentals those are used to create and manipulate geometric
1
models in a computer program.
2 To familiar the student different aspects of computer aided manufacturing
Total No. of Lectures –42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
Fundamentals of CAD
Introduction, Design Process, Application of computers in design, Creating
1 manufacturing database, benefits of CAD, Software configuration of a graphics 6
system, functions of a graphics package, coordinate systems, Product life cycle,
sequential and concurrent engineering.
Geometric Transformations
Mathematics preliminaries, matrix representation of 2 and 3 dimensional
transformations, scaling, mirror, translation, orthographic, perspective
2 6
transformations, Homogeneous transformations, Concatenation of transformation
matrices.

Geometric modeling
Need of Geometric Modeling, types of geometric modeling, geometric modeling
representation, and geometric modeling techniques and uses, parametric
representation of analytical curves line, circle, ellipse, conics and synthetic curves,
3 8
Hermite curve, Bezier curve, B spline curve , parametric representation of surfaces,
plane, surface of revolution, offset surface, ruled surface, Bezier, B spline patches,
Solid modeling, CSG and Boundary Representation, CAD standards- Graphical
Kernel System (GKS), Data exchange standards- IGES, STEP
Group Technology
4 Part families, part classification and coding system, OPTIZ, MICLASS, CODE 8
systems, Group technology machine cells, Production flow analysis.
CIM
Types of CIM systems, CAD-CAM link for CIMS, types of FMS, FMS layouts,
Automated material handling systems, equipment and their functions. Integration of
5 7
Robots in CIMS, automated guided vehicle navigation system, Automatic Storage
and Retrieval Systems (AS/RS), communication in automated manufacturing
systems.
Computer Aided Process Planning
6 Introduction and benefits of CAPP, types of CAPP, Steps in variant process planning, 7
planning for CAPP, machinability data selection systems in CAPP.
Sr. Course outcomes: Knowledge Level
No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
Students will be able to describe the principles of Computer Aided Designing
1 L1 & L2
systems and the concepts of Geometric transformations and modelling.
Students will be able to explain the basic concepts of CNC programming and L2 &
2
machining. L4
Students will able to know about group technology, Flexible Manufacturing
3 L5
Systems and Computer Aided Process Planning.

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 2 1 2 - - - - - - - 2 3 3
CO2 3 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 2 3 3
CO3 3 1 1 1 - - - - - - 1 2 2 3

Suggested Books:
Sr. Year of Publication/
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher
No. Reprint
Zimmer, E.W. and Groover, M.P., CAD/CAM – Computer Aided Designing 2008
1
and Manufacturing, Dorling Kingsley (2008).
2 Zeid, I. CAD/ CAM Theory and Practice. McGraw Hill. 2009 2009
Bedworth, D.D., Henderson, M.R. & Wolfe, P.M. Computer Integrated Design 1991
3
and Manufacturing. New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill. 1991
W. M. Neumann and R.F. Sproul, Principles of Computer Graphics, McGraw 1989
4
Hill, 1989.
Mikell P. Groover, Automation, Production Systems, and Computer-integrated 2007
5
Manufacturing, prentice Hall, 2007
6 YoramKoren, Computer control of manufacturing system, 1st edition, 2005 2005
Rogers, D. and Edams, Mathematical Elements For Computer Graphics, Mc 2017
7
Graw Hill, 2017.
8 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112102102/, http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112102103/
Departmental Elective Courses-I
Course Name : OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES IN ENGINEERING
Course Code : MEE1001
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-1-0

Course Objectives: In this course, the student will be able to

1 Understand engineering minima/maxima problems into optimization framework.
2 Learn computational procedures to solve optimization problems.
3 Learn software tool(s) to implement important optimization methods.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
INTRODUCTION: Introduction to Optimization, Adequate and Optimum Design,
1 Principles of Optimization, Statement of an Optimization Problem, Classification, 4
Formulation of Objective Function, Design Constraints.
ONE-DIMENSIONAL UNCONSTRAINED OPTIMIZATION METHODS:
Optimality Criteria - necessary and sufficient conditions, Bracketing methods,
2 Region-elimination methods, Point estimation method, Gradient based methods, 8
Sensitivity analysis. Introduction to MATLAB tool and its application to these
methods.
MULTI-DIMENSIONAL UNCONSTRAINED OPTIMIZATION METHODS:
Optimality Criteria, Unidirectional search, Direct search methods, Gradient-based
3 8
methods. Conjugate-direction methods, Quasi-Newton methods. MATLAB
application.
CONSTRAINED OPTIMIZATION METHODS: Constrained Optimization
Criteria, Penalty Methods, Method of Multipliers, Direct search methods,
4 6
Linearization methods, Feasible Direction method, Generalized Reduced Gradient
Method.
NON-TRADITIONAL OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES: Traditional vs non-
5 traditional optimization, need for nontraditional optimization techniques, evolution of 4
non-traditional optimization techniques in engineering.
GENETIC AND ANN TECHNIQUES: Genetic Algorithms, Simulated Annealing,
6 Particle Swarm Optimization, Fuzzy logics, Artificial Neural Network (ANN) based 12
Optimization. MATLAB application.

Knowledge
Sr. Course outcomes:
Level
No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to:
(Blooms Level)
1 Understand the fundamentals of Linear and Dynamic Programming problems. L2
2 Apply classical optimization techniques and numerical methods of optimization
L3
to solve problems.
3 Analyze and make inferences of different evolutionary algorithms. L4
4 Explain and identify the importance of Integer programming technique and
apply different techniques to solve engineering problems L5
5 Adapt software as a tool(s) to implement optimization algorithms. L6

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PSO PSO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
1 2
CO1 2 2 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO2 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO3 2 1 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
 CO4 2 3 2 3 2 - - - - - - 2 3 1
CO5 2 1 2 3 2 - - - - - - 1 2 1

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
Optimization for Engineering Design: Algorithms and Examples, Kalyanmoy Deb,
1 2012
PHI, New Delhi.
Genetic Algorithms in Search, Optimization and Machine Learning, Goldberg, D.E.,
2 1989
Addision-Wesley.
Multi-objective Optimization using Evolutionary Algorithms, Deb, K., John Wiley
3 2009
and Sons.
4 Engineering Optimization Theory and Practice, S. S. Rao, John Wiley and Sons. 2019
Modern Heuristic Optimization Techniques: Theory and Applications, Kwang Y.
5 2008
Lee, Mohamed A. El-Sharkawi, Kluwer.

Course Name : COMPUTER INTEGRATED DESIGN AND MANUFACTURING

Course Code : MEE1002
Credits : 4
LT P : 3-1-0

Course Objectives: To impart the knowledge of

1 Various phases of design and manufacturing of products considering different aspects of
manufacturability, ease of assembly and environment issues.
2 Computer integrated environment in Industries.
3 Smart factories with a concept of Industry 4.0.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
PRODUCT DESIGN: Introduction, Essential factors of product design, Phases and
approaches of design, Robust product design, parameter and tolerance design, Aesthetic 8
1
and ergonomics in product design.
COMPUTER INTEGRATED ENVIRONMENT: Integrating CAD/CAM/CAE
tools, objectives, product development cycle integrated with CAD/CAM tools, Concept
development and modelling, Introduction to finite element analysis and rapid 8
2
prototyping, product data management, Computer aided process planning, Flexible
manufacturing system, Concept of group technology, Rapid tooling.
NUMERICAL CONTROL IN MACHINING PROCESSES: Introduction to NC,
CNC and DNC Machines, Components of CNC machines, Control systems in CNC,
CNC tooling and fixtures, CNC part programming: G-Codes and M-Codes, Canned 8
3
cycles, Manual part programming, Computer aided part programming.
DESIGN FOR MANUFACTURING AND ENVIRONMENT: Design for
manufacturing (DFM), Design for assembly (DFA), guidelines and principles of DFM
and DFA, General design principles for manufacturability, Strength and mechanical
factors, Material selection, Process capability, Feature tolerances, Geometric tolerances, 8
4 Assembly processes, Design for environment: Introduction, objectives and issues,
guidelines, Lifecycle assessment, Basic method, Design to minimize material
usage, Design for recyclability, Design for Energy efficiency, Design for sustainability
 INDUSTRY 4.0: Introduction, Chronological development of Industry 4.0, Today's
factory, Globalization, Basic principles and technologies of a Smart Factory, Cyber
Physical Systems and Next Generation Sensors, Collaborative Platform and Product
10
Lifecycle Management, Internet of Things (IoT) & Industrial Internet of Things (IIoT)
5
& Internet of Services, Cloud Computing and Manufacturing, Security issues within
Industry 4.0 networks, Human-Robot Collaboration in Industry.

Sr. Course outcomes: Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Understand about the essential factors and phases of product design. L2
Apply the CAD/CAM tools in manufacturing, service and environmental
2 L3
aspects.
3 Apply the CNC and DNC machining processes in manufacturing. L3
4 Design for manufacturability and recyclability of product. L6
5 Estimate the energy efficiency in manufacturing. L5
6 Analyze and adapt of industry 4.0 in manufacturing. L4
CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO2 3 3 3 1 1 - - - - - 1 1 3 1
CO3 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 2
CO4 3 3 3 3 1 - 2 - - - 1 2 3 2
CO5 3 2 3 2 1 - - - - - - 1 3 2
CO6 2 2 2 1 1 - - - - - - 1 2 1

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
Product Design and Development, Karl T. Ulrich and Steven D. Eppinger, McGraw
1 1999
Hill
2 CAD/CAM Principles and Applications, P N Rao, Tata McGraw-Hill. 2010
3 CAD/CAM, H P Groover and E W Zimmers, Prentice Hall. 1984
Engineering Design and Design for Manufacture and Structural Approach, Dickson,
4 1995
John. R and Corroda Poly, Field Stone Publisher, USA.
5 Computer Aided Design and Manufacturing, Sadhu Singh, Khanna Publishers 1998
Industry 4.0: The Industrial Internet of Things, Alasdair Gilchrist, Apress, Springer 2017
6
Nature
7 The Fourth Industrial Revolution, Klaus Schwab, Penguin Random House 2017

Course Name : MECHANISMS AND MACHINES

Course Code : MEE1003
Credits : 4
L T P : 3 -1- 0
Course Objectives: In this course, the student will be able to understand the
1. Concepts of various basic Mechanisms and Machines.
2.Kinematic analysis and synthesis of mechanisms.
3.Design process based on different mechanisms for a given application.
4.Mechanisms to be used for various machines and do failure analysis.
 Total No. of Lectures – 42
Sr. No. Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
INTRODUCTION: Mechanisms, classifications, relative and absolute motion, four
bar mechanisms, planar and spatial mechanisms, inversion and equivalent linkage,
1 transmission deviation and pressure angles, kinematic analysis of planar motion, 6
relative velocity and velocity difference, pole and centrodes, relative acceleration and
acceleration difference.
KINEMATIC SYNTHESIS OF MECHANISMS: Movability, Number synthesis,
Frudenstein’s equation, Chebyshev spacing of precision points, Stages of kinematic
synthesis and errors, Two and three position synthesis of Four-bar mechanism & slider
10
crank mechanism, Overlay method, Bloch’s method, Transmission angle in four bar
2 and slider crank mechanism, function and path generation, Limit position & Least
square techniques.
LOWER PAIRS: Universal joint- single and double, calculation of maximum torque,
Oldham’s Coupling, steering mechanism including Ackermann’s and Davis steering
6
3 mechanism, concepts of power steering, Mechanism with lower pairs, pantograph,
exact and approximate straight-line motion, engine indicator, elliptical trammel.
BELTS, ROPES AND CHAINS: Materials, type of drive, idle pulley, intermediate or
counter shaft pulley, angle and right-angle drive, quarter turn drive, velocity ratio,
crowning of pulleys, loose and fast pulleys, stepped or cone pulleys, ratio of tensions on
tight and slake sides of belts. Power transmitted by belts including consideration of 6
creep and slip, centrifugal tension and its effect on power transmitted. Use of gravity,
4
idler, flat, V-belts and rope, materials, Length of belt, rope and chain drive, types of
chains.
FORCE ANALYSIS: Couple, equilibrium of forces and force systems, Free body
diagrams, D-Alembert principle, Forces on slider crank mechanism, quick return
mechanism & four-bar mechanism with more than two forces acting on a link, slider
6
crank mechanism, Forces and couples for link and reciprocating parts; Dynamically
5 equivalent system. analytical and graphical methods of solutions; Torque, inertia and
gravitational force of a four bar linkage.
BRAKES AND DYNAMOMETERS: Types of brakes, principles of friction brakes,
band, band & block and internal expanding shoe brakes, differential band brake,
description of vacuum brake, types of dynamometers, measurement of power by prone 8
6 brake and rope brake dynamometers, Heenan and Froude’s Hydraulic dynamometer,
Bevis-Gibson”s flash light torsion dynamometer, belt transmission dynamometer.

Sr. Course outcomes: Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Recall the basic concepts of Kinematics and Dynamics L1
2 Understand and apply concepts of kinematics and dynamics on the L2, L3
mechanism & machines.
3 Analysis and synthesis of mechanisms using different techniques. L4, L6
4 Understand and evaluate various power transmission elements for their L2, L5
kinematic domain.
5 Dynamic analysis of various power transmission elements and mechanisms. L4

CO-PO & PSO Course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 1 1
CO2 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO3 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO4 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - - 2 3 1
CO5 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - - 1 3 1

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Publication/
No. Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher
Reprint
1 Theory of Machines, V.P. Singh, Dhanpat Rai & Co. Pvt. Ltd., 2014
2 Theory of Machines, P.L. Ballaney, Khanna publishers. 1994
3 Theory of Machines, Shigley, Tata McGraw Hill. 1981
4 Mechanism & Machine Theory, J.S. Rao & R.V. Dukhipati, Wiley Eastren Ltd. 1992
Theory of Mechanisms, Amitabh Gosh & A.K. Mallik, East West Press Machines
5 2008
Private Ltd.
6 Theory of Machines, S S. Rattan, McGraw Hill Education (India) 2019

Course Name : VIBRATION AND NOISE CONTROL

Course Code : MEE1004
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-1-0

Course Objectives: In this course, the student should be able to understand

1 Theoretical and practical aspects of noise and vibration.
2 About the sources of vibration and noise in mechanical systems.
3 About the measurement techniques and instruments used in industry.

Total No. of Lectures – 42

Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
INTRODUCTION: Review of vibration theory, one degree, two degrees, and multi-
1 3
degrees of freedom vibration systems.
VIBRATIONS UNDER GENERAL FORCING CONDITIONS: Response under
2 periodic force of regular and non-regular form, non-periodic force using Convolution 7
Integral and Laplace transform.
MEASUREMENT AND ANALYSIS OF VIBRATIONS: Vibration measuring
3 and analyzing instruments. Various types of transducers, data acquisition system, 6
vibration analysis techniques.
VIBRATION CONTROL: Reduction of Vibration at the Source, Vibration
4 7
Isolation, Vibration absorbers, active and semi-active vibration control systems.
FUNDAMENTALS OF NOISE: One dimensional wave equation, Sound
5 propagation in 3-D space, important acoustic quantities and their relations, additive 6
effects of sound.
MEASUREMENT OF SOUND: Various types of transducers, measurement of
6 6
sound pressure, sound intensity and sound power.
NOISE CONTROL: Principles of passive noise control, sound absorption, noise
7 7
barriers, and active noise control.

Sr. Course outcomes: Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Review the fundamentals of vibrations and sound. L1
2 Evaluate the vibration under general forcing condition. L5
3 Measure, analyze and control vibrations in a machine. L2, L4
 4 Design and develop vibration and noise control systems. L6
5 Apply the vibration and noise standards on engineering systems. L3

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 1 1 1 - 1 1 - - - - 1 2 1
CO2 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO3 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 - 2 1 - - - - 1 3 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 - 2 1 - - - - 2 3 2
Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
1 Mechanical Vibrations, S. S. Rao, Pearson Education Inc. 2017
2 Mechanical Vibrations, V. P. Singh, Dhanpat Rai & Sons, Delhi 2014
3 Fundamental of Vibrations, Leonard Meirovitch, Mc-Graw Hill Inc. 2001
Noise control in industry: a practical guide, Cheremisinoff, Nicholas, Noyes
4 2003
Publications, New Jersey.
Fundamentals of noise and vibrations analysis for engineers, Norton, M.P and
5 2003
Karczub, D.G, Cambridge University press, New York.
Fundamentals of noise and vibration, Fahy, Frank and Walker, John, Taylor and
6 1998
Francis, London.
7 Mechanical Vibrations, 6th edition by Singiresu S. Rao, Pearson Education, India 2018

Course Name : PRODUCTION ENGINEERING

Course Code : MEE1005
Credits : 4
LT P : 310
Course Objectives:
To imparts the specialized knowledge of CNC machines and CNC programming for machining
1
processes.
To impart the knowledge on design and fabrication of various types of Jigs, Fixtures, Dies and
2 Tooling used in manufacturing of various products.
To impart the knowledge of geometrical tolerances, surface finishes and fits system used in
3
mechanical assembly.
To impart the knowledge of process planning and process optimization, optimal machining speed and
4
maximum production rate with optimal cost.

Total No. of Lectures –42

Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
NC AND CNC MACHINES: Introduction, Components, Control systems, CNC
tooling and fixtures, CNC part programming: basic G-Codes and M-Codes, Canned
1 7
cycles, Manual part programming, Computer aided part programming (APT), Canned
cycles
JIGS & FIXTURE DESIGN: Principles, design of jigs and fixtures,
degrees of freedom, principle of locating and clamping, hydraulic and pneumatic
2 8
locating and clamping devices, jigs for drilling, drill bushes; Fixtures: milling, lathe,
drilling, grinding, broaching, boring and Assembly fixtures.
 TOOL AND DIE DESIGN: Press tool operations: Shearing, blanking, piercing,
trimming, shaving, notching, nibbling, coining, bending, drawing, embossing, stretch
forming; Press working equipment’s, Dies: Types, components of cutting die; methods
3 8
of reducing cutting forces; Die design: blanking die, piercing die, drawing die and
bending die, forging dies, design of die blocks, punches and strippers; Strip layout,
Mathematical analysis of tool and die design.
MANUFACTURING OF TOOLS AND DIES: Manufacturing of Single, double
and multi-point cutting tools, Carbide tool inserts, brazed tools, coated tools,
4 Manufacturing of Dies, die materials, electro-removal processes, cast dies, Resinking 7
of dies, sizes of die blocks, various conventional and non-conventional methods for
die manufacturing, heat treatment of cutting tools and dies, Numerical analysis. MT
METROLOGY& INSPECTION: Limits, fits and tolerances, standard and limit
gauges, design of gauges, elements of surface roughness, evaluation of surface
roughness, representation of surface roughness, Measurement of surface roughness,
5 surface finishing process, steps of inspection, introduction to coordinate measuring 6
machine and automated inspection technique, elements and relationship of surface
finish related to production methods and measurement; measuring devices used in
inspection and quality control.
OPTIMIZATION OF MACHINING CONDITION: Optimization of cutting speed
for minimum cost and maximum production, machining parameters optimization,
6 Machine Tool replacement, method of distributing depreciation, Introduction to 6
reverse engineering and applications, mathematical techniques for optimization, single
variable and multi-variable optimization techniques.

Knowledge
Course outcomes: By the end of this course, the student will be able to: Level
(Blooms Level)
Understand the hardware of CNC machines, supportive tooling system such as Jigs L2
1
and Fixtures for smooth manufacturing activities.
Understand the fact and idea of various types of press working tools/ dies, their L2
2
manufacturing processes and quality inspection devices.
Interpret different types of geometric fits and selection of suitable L5
3
manufacturing process for required geometrical tolerances.
4 Design different types of tools and dies L6
Apply G-codes and M-codes for creating CNC part programming for various L3
5
machining operations.
CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 2 2 1 1 - - - - - 1 1 2 2
CO2 3 3 3 1 - - - - - - 2 1 3 2
CO3 2 2 3 1 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 1 - - - - 2 1 3 2
CO5 3 3 3 1 2 - - - - - - 1 3 2

Year of
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
Reprint
1 Tool Design, Donaldson, TMH Publication 2010
2 Fundamentals of tool Design, ASTME 2010
3 Production Engineering, P.C. Sharma, S Chand Publications. 2014
4 Jig and Fixture Design, Edward G Hoffman, Cengage learning 2004
5 Manufacturing Technology (Machining), P.N. Rao, 2nd ed., Tata McGraw Hill. 2017
Course Name : CONVECTIVE HEAT AND MASS TRANSFER
Course Code : MEE1006
Credits : 4
LT P : 3-1-0
Course Objectives:
1 To understand basic principles of free and forced convection heat transfer processes.
2 To be able to formulate and solve convective heat transfer problems.
3 To be able to evaluate energy requirements for operating a flow system.
4 To understand the mass transfer processes.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
INTRODUCTION: Basics of thermodynamics, Fluid mechanics and heat transfer,
1 Continuity, momentum and energy equations, Reynolds transport theorem, Rules of 4
scale analysis, Concept of heat line visualization.
LAMINAR FORCED CONVECTION - EXTERNAL FLOWS: Boundary layer
concept, velocity and thermal boundary layer, Governing equations, Similarity
2 9
solutions, Various wall heating conditions, Flow over sphere, wedge and stagnation
flow.
LAMINAR FORCED CONVECTION - INTERNAL FLOWS: Fully developed
laminar flow: Constant heat flux, Constant wall temperature, Mean temperature,
3 5
Fully developed temperature and velocity profile, Thermally developing flow and
thermal-hydraulical developing flow.
EXTERNAL NATURAL CONVECTION: Governing equations for natural
convection, Boussinesq approximation, Dimensional analysis, Boundary layer
4 7
equations, Scale analysis, Low and high Prandtl number fluids, Combined natural and
forced convection.
INTERNAL NATURAL CONVECTION: Scaling analysis, Natural convection in
5 enclosures: Isothermal and constant heat flux, Side-walls and triangular enclosures, 6
Heated from below, Inclined enclosures, Annular space between horizontal cylinders.
TURBULENT BOUNDARY LAYER FLOW: Transaction to turbulent flow,
Turbulent flow and its characteristics, Boundary layer equations, Mixing length
6 6
model, Flow over a single cylinder, Cross-flow over array of cylinders, Natural
convection along vertical walls, Turbulent duct flow and Free turbulent flows.
MASS TRANSFER: Introduction to mass transfer, Concentrations, velocities and
mass fluxes, Governing equations of mass transfer: Species mass balance,
7 constitutive equations, Boundary conditions, Heat and mass transfer analogy, 5
Impermeable surface model, Mass transfer driven flows and Simultaneous heat and
mass transfer.

Sr. Course outcomes: Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
Revisit the basics of thermodynamics, heat transfer and fluid
1 L2
mechanics.
Apply the concepts of convective heat transfer to solve the problems of
2 L3
theoretical and practical interest.
Analyze thermo-hydrodynamics of internal and external, laminar and
3 L4
turbulent, and natural and forced convection flows.
Optimize, evaluate, and design the convective heat transport based
4 L5 & L6
thermal systems.
Analysis and application of mass transport principles to cooling tower,
5 L4
condensers, and humidifier/dehumidifier.
 PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 1 1
CO2 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 1 1
CO3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - - - 2 2
CO4 3 3 3 3 1 - - - - - - - 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - - - 3 2

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
1 Convection Heat Transfer, A. Bejan, John Willey and Sons, New York. 2001
2 Convective Heat Transfer, Louis, C. Burmeister, John Willey and Sons, New York. 2003
3 Convective Heat and Mass Transfer, Kays and Crawford, 4th Ed., McGraw Hill. 2017
Convective Heat and Mass Transfer, S. Mostafa Ghiaasiaan, South Asian Edition,
4 2014
Cambridge India
Fundamentals of Convective Heat Transfer, Gautam Biswas, Amaresh Dalal, Vijay
5 2019
K. Dhir, 1st ed., CRC Press.

Course Name : INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES

Course Code : MEE1007
Credits : 4
LTP : 3-1-0

Course Objectives: Students will learn about

1 The basic cycles of operation of internal combustion engines.
2 Basic configuration of I.C. engines and its different parts.
3 Different sub-systems of IC engines.
The design/operating characteristics of different types of internal combustion engines which affect its
4
performance.
5 Recent developments in the field of IC engine fuels and other non-conventional engines.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
INTRODUCTION: Heat Engines, Internal and external combustion engines,
classification of I.C. Engines, Cycles of operation in 4 stroke /2stroke /SI/CI
1 4
engines, Valve timings diagram, low speed and high-speed engines, Rotary
/Wankel Engines, Applications, Performance parameters.
WORKING CYCLES: Air standard cycles: assumptions, Otto, Diesel and Dual
cycles, efficiency, M.E.P. & their comparison. Fuel Air Cycles: effect of
2 4
dissociation and operating variables, comparison of air standard and fuel-air cycles.
Actual Cycles, losses, comparison with air standard cycles.
IC ENGINES’ SYSTEMS: Carburetion System: definition, Air-Fuel ratio, simple
carburetor, essential parts of carburetor, compensating devices. Fuel Injection
Systems: classification, parts of mechanical fuel injection systems and brief study of
electronic injection systems. Ignition Systems: energy requirement, Battery/
3 Magneto/ Modern ignition systems, i.e., TCI and CDI systems, Ignition timing and 9
firing order, Spark advance mechanism. Cooling and Lubrication Systems: wet,
mist and dry sump lubrication systems, Factors affecting mechanical friction, Lube
properties SAE rating, necessity of cooling, parameters affecting engine heat
transfer, air and water cooling, Radiators
 COMBUSTION IN I.C. ENGINES: Homogeneous/Heterogeneous mixtures,
stages of combustion in S.I. Engines, velocity of flame propagation; detonation,
effects of engine variables on detonation; theories of detonation, pre-ignition, S.I.
4 8
engine combustion chambers. Stages of combustion in C.I. Engines; delay period;
variables affecting delay period; knock in C.I. engines, C.I. engine combustion
chambers.
ENGINE EMMISSION AND CONTROL: Pollution due to IC Engines, Exhaust
Emissions -Hydrocarbons, Carbon Monoxide, Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx), Other
5 Emissions. Controls: Thermal Converters, Catalytic Converters, Particulate Traps, 4
Chemical Methods, Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR), Evaporation Control
Device, Crankcase Blow-by.
ENGINE TESTING AND PERFORMANCE: Measurement of Power, Fuel/ Air
Consumption, Speed etc. Performance Parameters: BHP, IHP, FHP, Mechanical,
6 Indicated and Brake Thermal Efficiency, Mean Effective Pressure, Charging 5
Efficiency, Volumetric Efficiency, bsfc, isfc, Heat Balance Sheet, Performance
Curves
SPECIAL TOPICS: Supercharging, Variable Compression Ratio (VCR) Engine,
Two stroke engines, Common Rail Direct Injection (CRDI) Engines, Dual fuel
7 /multi-fuel engines, Homogeneous charge compression ignition (HCCI) engine, 8
Wankel Engine, Stratified Charge engines, Alternate fuels for IC engines, Hybrid
Electric Propulsive System, Comparison of automatic propulsion system.

S. Course outcomes: Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Bloom Level)
1. Identify and rationally choose the appropriate type of I.C. Engine(s) for a
particular application. L2
2. Apply the basic concepts to select the different subsystems of an IC engine. L3
3. Analyze the performance of engines at different operating parameters. L4
4. Analyze and justify the suitability of conventional and non-conventional fuel
L4
for existing and futuristic IC engines.
5. Select and modify the combustion system integrals to minimize pollution L5 & L6
CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 1 1 1 - - - - - - - - 1 1
CO2 3 3 2 2 - - 2 - - - - 1 3 2
CO3 3 3 2 2 - - 2 - - - - 1 1 2
CO4 3 3 2 2 - 1 3 - - - - 2 1 1
CO5 3 3 3 2 - - 3 - - - - 2 2 1

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
1 Internal Combustion Engines, V Ganeshan, 4th ed., Mc Graw Hill 2017
Internal Combustion Engines, M.L. Mathur and R.P. Sharma, Dhanpat Rai
2 2010
Publication
Engineering Fundamentals of Internal Combustion Engines, Willard W. Pulkrabek,
3 2007
Pearson
Internal Combustion Engines Fundamentals, John B. Heywood, Mcgraw Hill
4 2017
Science
Internal Combustion Engines Applied Thermo-sciences, Colin R. Ferguson, Allan
5 2015
T. Kirkpatrick, 3rd ed., Wiley, Student Edition
Course Name : POWER PLANT ENGINEERING
Course Code : MEE1027
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-1-0

Course Objectives:
1 To understand different types of steam cycles and estimate efficiencies in a steam power plant.
2 To describe basic working principles of hydro, gas turbine, diesel engine and nuclear power plants.
3 To understand the power plant economics, depreciation and cost of producing power.

Total No. of Lectures – 42

Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
STEAM POWER PLANT: Introduction, configuration of steam power plant, basic
cycles of operation, Reheat-regenerative cycle, binary cycle, topping and superimposed
cycle.
Steam generators: Modern generators, once through and fluidized bed boilers design.
Consideration of modern steam generators, furnace, fuel firing methods, fuel and ash
1 handling systems, various accessories of steam generators, steam pressure & temperature 12
control.
Steam Turbines: Details of construction, accessories, governing, turbine blades, power
calculations, arrangement of turbines, industrial turbines. Condensers and Cooling
Towers: Performance, heat transfer design, calculations, efficiencies, detail construction,
cooling water circuit, environmental aspects.
HYDEL POWER PLANT: Hydrology, rainfall measurement hydrographs, flow
duration curves, site selection, classification of hydro stations, capacity of hydro stations,
selection of prime movers, governing of water turbines, operation of different
2 6
components of hydro station reservoirs, dam, spillway, canals, penstock, water hammer
surge tank, Draft-tubes, specific speeds of turbines, Advantages and disadvantages of
HPP.
DIESEL POWER PLANT: Diesel plant elements, arrangements of diesel plant, diesel
engine fuel injection system, air intake system, engine lubrication and engine cooling
3 systems, supercharging and superchargers. Methods of starting and stopping the engines. 6
Advantages and disadvantages of using diesel power plant, Economics of diesel plant
over steam and hydro-electric plant.
GAS TURBINE POWER PLANT: General features and characteristics and their
application power plants, Analysis of different cycles, components of gas turbine power
4 plants, governing system of gas turbine plant, advantages of G. T. plant, Gas and steam 8
turbines, combined cycles –Thermodynamic analysis for optimum design, advantages and
performance of combined cycles, economics of combined cycle.
NUCLEAR POWER PLANT: Atomic structure, energy levels, binding energy.
Radioactivity, decay laws, half-life, nuclear reaction. The fission chain reaction
(Controlled and uncontrolled). Maintenance of chain reaction, heat removal, reactor fuels
and materials. Some common types of power reactors. Pressurized water reactor, boiling
5 7
water reactor and gas cooled reactor. Reactor system safety provisions, Fusion reaction,
site selection, Economics of nuclear power plants, Air pollution, Power plant and the air
pollution, Units of radiation dose, Control of internal and external hazards, Combined
cycle with nuclear power plants.
POWER PLANT ECONOMICS: Fluctuating load on power plants, load curves,
various performance factors of power station. Effect of variable load power plant design
6 and operation. Economic analysis of power plants, tariffs, load division, combined 3
operation of different power plants, heat rate, incremental heat rate, selection of power
plant and station equipment.
Sr. Course outcomes: Knowledge Level
No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Understand, identify and interpret constructional features and working of L1, L2, L3, L4
various components of Steam power plant.
2 Classify various types of fuels used in thermal power plant and explain their L1, L2, L3, L4
handling, combustion etc. Explain ash handling and dust collection
mechanism, principle of fluidized bed combustion
3 Understand, identify and interpret constructional features and working of L1, L2, L3, L4
various components of Hydel power plant.
4 Understand, identify and interpret constructional features and working of L1, L2, L3, L4
various components of Diesel and gas power plant.
5 Understand, identify and interpret constructional features and working of L1, L2, L3, L4
various components of nuclear power plant.
6 Evaluate the Effect of variable load power plant design and operation and its L1, L2, L3, L4,
economic analysis. L5
CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 3 2 - - - - - - - - 2 3 1
CO2 3 3 2 - - - - - - - - 2 3 1
CO3 3 3 2 - - - - - - - - 2 3 1
CO4 3 3 2 - - - - - - - - 2 3 1
CO5 3 3 2 - - - - - - - - 2 3 1
CO6 3 3 2 - - - - - - - - 2 3 1

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
1 Power Plant Engineering, T. Morse, Tata McGraw Hill. 2010
2 Power Station Engineering & Economy, Skrotzki, McGraw Hill. 2008
3 Steam Power Plants, Potter, Ronald Press co., New York 2011
4 Nuclear Power Plant, Taylor, Philosophical Library. 2010
5 Power Plant Engineering, Mahesh Verma, Metropolitan. 2012
6 Power Plant Engineering, Domkundwar, Dhanpat Rai and sons 2016
Departmental Elective Courses-II
Course Name : TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT
Course Code : MEE1008
Credits : 4
LTP : 3-1-0

Course Objectives: To imparts the knowledge of

1 Basic concepts in Quality, Quality planning & Control and Process capabilities.
2 Statistical Process Control and use of Quality Control charts in manufacturing and service sectors.
3 Total Quality Management concepts and Quality Standard (ISO) systems.
4 Reliability and Six Sigma and applications in industries.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
1 INTRODUCTION: Introduction to quality (Services and manufacturing), Quality planning
4
and control, Quality cost, Economics of quality control, Phases of quality evolution
2 PROCESS CAPABILITY & MEASUREMENTS: Specification, tolerances and process
capability studies, precision reproducibility and accuracy of method measurement, Taguchi 4
method.
3 STATISTICAL QUALITY CONTROL: Inspection and quality control, statistical quality
control, statistical process control, sampling plans and control charts for variables and attributes, 8
economics of sampling charts.
QUALITY CONCEPTS: Quality Assurance, Total Quality Control, Total quality concept,
4 4
Deming’s 14 points.
TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT: Concept, quality planning and improvement, quality
5 6
team and circles, just in time (JIT).
QUALITYSTANDARDS: Definition,applications,implementationprocedureand requirements
6 of Quality, ISO 9001, ISO 9002, ISO 9003, ISO 9004, ISO 14000, ISO 27000, 6
ISO 31000, Quality standards.
QUALITY & RELIABILITY: Product quality and reliability, failure data analysis and life
7 6
testing, redundancy in design.
SIX SIGMA: Concept, definition, procedure and applications, TQM and six sigma, Indian
8 4
industries, certification, process capabilities and case studies.

Sr. Course outcomes: Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the students will be able to: (Blooms Level)
Understand the concepts of concepts of Quality & Quality standards in industries.
1 L2
Remember the capabilities of various processes in industries and service sectors.
2 L1
Apply the concepts of sampling plans and control charts for process improvement in
3 L3
various organizations.
4 Apply the concepts of TQM, Quality Assurance and JIT in industries. L3
5 Analyze the ISO Quality standards; used in various organizations. L4
Estimate the reliability of various systems and Apply the Six Sigma concepts in
6 L5
industries and service sectors.
 CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 2 1 1 1 2 1 - - - 2 - 1 2
CO2 2 1 2 1 2 - 2 - - - 1 - 1 1
CO3 3 2 1 - 2 - 2 - 1 - 1 - 1 2
CO4 3 1 1 2 1 2 2 - 1 - 2 - 1 2
CO5 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 - 1 1 - - 1 2
CO6 2 2 2 - 2 1 1 - - 2 2 - 1 2

Suggested Books:
Year of Publication/
Sr. No. Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher
Reprint
1 Statistical Quality Control, E. L. Grant, 6th ed., McGraw-Hill 2017
Statistical Quality Control, M. Mahajan, Dhanpat Rai & Co. (P)
2 2016
Limited
3 Statistical Quality Control, J. M. Juran, 5th ed., McGraw-Hill 1990
4 Quality Control, Hansen & Ghare, PHI 2005
5 Statistical Quality Control, R.C. Gupta, 9th ed., Khanna Publishers 2016

Course Name : FRACTURE MECHANICS AND FATIGUE

Course Code : MEE1009
Credits : 4
LTP : 3-1-0

Course Objectives: In this course student will be able to understand

1.The physical and mathematical principles of fracture mechanics and fatigue.
2.Crack problem formulation through stress, displacement and energy methods.
3.The design principles of materials & structures using various fracture mechanics approaches with lower
factor of safety.
4.The modern theory of fatigue dealing with nucleation and rate of propagation of crack.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
BACKGROUND: Introduction, kinds of failure & history, brittle and ductile
1 fracture, modes of fracture failure, different techniques of fracture mechanics,
3
potency of a crack, damage tolerance.
ENERGY RELEASE RATE (ERR): Introduction, Griffith’s work and his
dilemma, Surface energy, Griffith’s realization and analysis, Mathematical
2 formulation of ERR, ERR of Double Cantilever Beam specimen, anelastic
6
deformation at crack tip, crack resistance, stable and unstable crack growth, R- curve
for brittle crack, Thin plate v/s thick plate, critical ERR.
STRESS INTENSITY FACTOR (SIF): Introduction, Linear Elastic Fracture
Mechanics, stress and displacement fields in isotropic elastic material, SIF and its
3
mathematical background, Approach of Westergaard for different mode of fracture 9
and its analysis.
SIF OF MORE COMPLEX CASES: Other applications of Westergaard approach,
application of the principles of superposition, crack in a plate of finite dimensions,
4
Edge and embedded cracks, Relationship between ERR and SIF, critical SIF, 5
bending and twisting of cracked plates.
ANELASTIC DEFORMATION AT THE CRACK TIP: Investigation at the
5
crack tip, approximate shape and size of the plastic zone, effective crack length, 4
 effect of plate thickness.
ELASTIC PLASTIC ANALYSIS THROUGH J-INTEGRAL: Relevance and
6 scope, definition of J-integral, path independence, stress-strain relation, discussion on
4
J-integral, Engineering Approach of J-integral.
CRACK TIP OPENING DISPLACEMENT (CTOD): Introduction, relationship
7 between CTOD, SIF and ERR for small scale yielding, Equivalence between CTOD 4
and J integral,
TEST METHODS: KIC test techniques, Test methods to determine JIC, Test methods
8 2
to determine GIC and GIIC, Determination of critical CTOD.
FATIGUE FAILURE: Introduction, Terminology, S-N curve, crack initiation,
9 crack propagation, Effect of an overload, crack closure, variable amplitude fatigue 3
load.
CRACK DETECTION THROUGH NDT: Visual, LPI, Magnetic Methods,
10 2
Radiography, Ultrasonic

Sr. Course outcomes: Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Recall various kind of failures, ductile and brittle fracture of metals. L1
2 Understand various modes of fracture and analyze the behavior of
engineering materials having microscopic flaws by various approach L2, L4
3 Apply the concepts of fracture mechanics philosophy to design of structural
components taking into account presence of flaws, nature of loading and L3, L6
constitutive behavior of the material.
4 Apply the concept of fatigue failure of structure under variable fluctuation
L3
loading to engineering problems
5 Understand the various test procedures to determine the fracture mechanics
L2, L5
parameters of the materials.

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 3 2 3 2 2 1 - - - - 2 3 2
CO2 3 3 2 3 2 2 2 - - - - 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - - - 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - - - 3 3 3
CO5 3 3 2 3 2 2 1 - - - - 2 3 2

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
1 Elements of Fracture Mechanics, Prashant Kumar, 1st ed., TMH, New Delhi. 2017
Elementary Engineering Fracture Mechanics, David Broek, Kluwer Academic
2 1986
Publishers Group, Dordrecht, Netherlands.
Fracture Mechanics - Fundamentals and Applications, T. L. Anderson, 3rded., CRC
3 2005
Press, Taylor and Francis Group
Fracture Mechanics by E. E. Gdoutos, 2nd ed., Springer International Publishing,
4 2005
Springer Nature Switzerland AG.
5 Elementary Fracture Mechanics, S. A. Meguid, 1st ed.,Springer Netherlands, 1989
6 Introduction to Fracture Mechanics, Kare Hellan, McGraw Hill Book Company. 1985
e-book on Engineering Fracture Mechanics: K Ramesh, Published by IIT Madras,
7 2015
India, URL: https://apm.iitm.ac.in/smlab/kramesh/book_4.htm
Course Name : MODELING AND SIMULATION
Course Code : MEE1010
Credits : 4
LTP : 3-1-0

Total No. of Lectures – 42

Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
INTRODUCTION: System, environment, input and output variables, State variables,
Static and Dynamic systems, Hierarchy of knowledge about a system and modeling 8
1
strategy, Physical Modeling: Similarity criteria and their application.
MODELING OF SYSTEM: Review of conservation laws and governing equations of
heat, mass and momentum transfer, Deterministic model: Distributed parameter models
in terms of partial identification and their solutions, Lumped parameter models in terms 10
2 of differential and difference equations, state space model, transfer functions
block diagram and sub systems, stability of transfer functions, modeling for control.
SYSTEM SIMULATION: Techniques of simulation, Monte Carlo method,
Experimental nature of simulation, Numerical computation techniques, Continuous
8
3 system models, Analog and Hybrid simulation, Feedback systems, Computers in
simulation studies, Simulation software packages.
SYSTEM DYNAMICS: Growth and Decay models, Logistic curves, System dynamics
diagrams, Probability Concepts in Simulation: Stochastic variables, discrete and
8
4 continuous probability functions, Random numbers, Generation of Random
numbers, Variance reduction techniques, Determination of length of simulation runs.
SIMULATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS: Building of Simulation models,
Simulation of translational and rotational mechanical systems, Simulation of hydraulic
and pneumatic systems, Simulation of waiting line systems, Job shop with material 8
5 handling and flexible manufacturing systems, Simulation software for manufacturing,
Structure and development of expert systems.

Sr. Course outcomes: Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to (Blooms Level)
Recall the conservation laws and governing equations of heat, mass and
1 momentum transfer. L1
2 Understand various systems and their input/output and state variables. L2
Apply the concepts of physical and deterministic models for modelling of
3 L3
systems.
Analyse and evaluate various system simulation techniques and feedback
4 L4
control systems.
Generate and evaluate the system equations using different modelling
5 L5 & L6
techniques.
6 Develop mechanical systems and perform its simulations. L3 & L6
CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 1 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 1 1
CO2 2 3 3 2 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO3 3 3 3 3 1 - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 1 - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO6 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - 1 3 1
Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
Principles of Modeling and Simulation: A Multidisciplinary Approach, John A.
1 2009
Sokolowski and Catherine M. Banks, Elsevier.
Theory of Modeling and Simulation, Zeigler B.P. Praehofer and I.G. Kim, 2nd ed.,
2 2000
Academic press.
System Dynamics, Modeling and Simulation of Mechatronic Systems, D.C. Karnopp,
3 2018
D.L. Margolis and R.C. Rosenberg, John Wiley & Sons, NY.

Course Name : KINEMATICS AND DYNAMICS OF ROBOTS

Course Code : MEE1011
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-0-2

Course Objectives:
1 To impart the knowledge about anatomy of the robots.
2 To demonstrate the concepts of kinematics & dynamics of robot.
3 To demonstrate the robot programming and their applications in industrial robots.
4 To provide the knowledge of how industrial robots’ functions.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
INTRODUCTION OF ROBOTICS: Definition of a robot, Robot Anatomy, types
of robotic joints and motions, Classifications of robot: Physical configurations,
1 actuators and motion control, Terminologies used for robotics specification and 5
selection for industrial applications, Design and Control issues, manipulation and
control, end effector.
COORDINATE FRAMES, MAPPING AND TRANSFORMS: Coordinate
frames: Mapping between rotated frames, Mapping between translated frames,
Mapping between combined rotated and translated frames, Description of objects in
2 space, Transformation of vectors, composite transformation, inverting a 7
homogeneous transform, Fundamental rotation matrices: Principal axes rotation,
fixed angle representation, Euler angle representation, equivalent angle axis
representation.
ROBOT KINEMATICS: Mechanical structure and notation, description of links
and joints, kinematic modeling of the Robot, Denavit-Hartenberg notation,
3 8
Kinematic relationship between adjacent links, Robot transformation matrix,
forward and inverse kinematics for basic industrial robotic configurations.
JACOBIAN FOR VELOCITY AND STATIC FORCES: Notation for time
varying position and orientation, linear and rotational velocity of rigid bodies,
4 angular velocity, motion of the link of a robot, velocity propagation of link to link, 6
Jacobians, singularities, static forces in robots, Jacobian in the force domain,
Cartesian transformation of velocities and static forces.
ROBOT DYNAMICS: Introduction to Lagrangian mechanics and Dynamic
5 equation for 2 DOF robots, Introduction to position control and force control of 6
robotic robots, Robot actuation and control using PID controllers.
ROBOT PROGRAMMING: Programming methods, Robot language
6 classification, Robot language structure, elements and its functions, Motion, End- 4
effecter and sensor commands in VAL programming language.
7 ROBOT VISION: Sensing and digitization of vision data, Image Processing: 6
 image data reduction, segmentation, feature extraction, object recognition and
training of vision system.

Sr. Course outcomes: Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
Understand the basics concepts of robots and apply the transformations for
1 L2 & L3
mapping of frames and axis rotations
2 Develop the forward and inverse kinematics of robots. L6
3 Analyze the forces in links and joints of a robot. L4
4 Apply the Lagrange equation to evaluate the dynamics of a robotic arm. L3 & L5
Understand the robot vision and robot Programming methods and language to
5 L2
perform tasks in industrial applications.
Ability to program a robot for different robot configuration to perform
6 L4
different tasks.
CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO2 3 2 2 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 2
CO3 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 1 3 2
CO4 3 3 2 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO5 3 3 2 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO6 1 1 1 1 - 1 - - - - - 1 2 2

List of experiments No. of Turns

The experiment work in this course is intended to be carried out in the area of basic of
Industrial Robotics, Robot Analyzer for learning different robot configuration, robot 14
kinematics and programming in the Simens CoE Robotics Lab.

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
Fundamental concepts and analysis, Ashitava Ghosal, Robotics, Oxford University
1 2006
Press.
Robotics Control, Sensing, Vision and Intelligence, K. S. Fu, R. C. Gonzalez, C. S. G.
2 1987
Lee, McGraw-Hill.
3 Introduction to Robotics: Mechanics and Control, John. J. Craig, PHI. 2005
Robotic Engineering An Integrated Approach, R. D. Klafter, T.A. Chmielewski, M.
4 2007
Negin, PHI.
5 Fundamentals of Robotics: Analysis & Control, Robert J. Schilling, Pearson Education. 2000
6 Robotics, K. K. Appuu Kuttan, I K Internationals 2013

Course Name : PRECISION ENGINEERING

Course Code : MEE1012
Credits : 4
LTP : 3-0-2
Course Objectives:
1. To understand the concept of precision engineering and its principles.
2. To familiarize the importance as applicable to instruments and machines.
3. To familiarize with MEMS-principle, elements-characteristics-design and application.
4. To familiarize with the nanotechnology and electrochemical atomic bit processing.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
CONCEPT OF PRECISION ENGINEERING: Introduction to accuracy &
precision, need and applications of precision engineering, Tool based Micro &
1 6
Ultra precision processes, Materials for tools and machine elements, ceramic, CBN
& diamond micro tools.
ULTRA-PRECISION MACHINE ELEMENTS: Introduction of Guide ways,
2 Drive systems, Spindle drive, preferred numbers, Rolling elements, hydrodynamic 6
& hydrostatic bearings, pneumatic bearing.
MEMS: Introduction, Principle, Elements, Characteristics, Design, applications in
3 6
automobile, defense, aerospace, medical sectors.
ERROR CONTROL: Error, Sources, Static stiffness, Variation of the cutting
force, total compliance, Machining methods: milling, drilling, grinding; Thermal
4 effects: heat source, heat dissipation, Stabilization, decreasing of thermal effects; 7
effects of forced vibration on accuracy, clamping & setting errors, errors due to
locations and Control, principle of constant location surfaces.
SURFACE ENGINEERING: Surface finish, Relationship between attainable
tolerance grades and different machining processes, Cumulative effect of
5 5
tolerances, sure fit law, normal law and truncated normal law related to surface
finish.
FUNDAMENTALS OF NANOTECHNOLOGY: System of nano-meter
6 accuracies, Mechanism of metal Processing, Nano physical processing of atomic bit 6
units, Nanotechnology and Electrochemical atomic bit processing.
MEASURING SYSTEMS: In-processing and in-situ measurement of position,
7 Post process and on-machine measurements, dimensional, mechanical and optical 6
measuring systems.

List of practical’s / mini-projects No. of Turns

1 Experiments on Micro EDM and analysis of accuracy & precision of machined 4
surface finish
2 Mini project on MEMS. 4
3 Micro gear cutting and analysis of accuracy, clamping & setting errors. 3
4 Grinding analysis of thermal effects. 3

Sr. Course outcomes: Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to (Blooms Level)
1 Understanding the concept and need for Precision Engineering. L2
Apply the concept of precision engineering and its principle in the ultra-
2 L3
precision domain.
Analyze the tolerance grades and physical processes applied to surface
3 L4
engineering.
4 Design the various components of MEMS for different industries. L6
Measure and Judge to select different measuring systems used in precision
5 L5
engineering.
Estimate the error and analyse the thermal effects on machining methods
6 L5
applied to manufacturers of precision components.
CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 1 1 1 1 1 - - - - - - 1 1 1
CO2 2 1 1 1 2 - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO3 2 2 2 2 2 - - - - - - 2 2 2
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 - - - 2 - - 2 3 2
CO5 2 2 2 2 3 - 1 - - - - 2 2 3
CO6 3 3 3 2 3 - 2 - - - - 2 3 2

Text Books:
Sr. Name of the Book/ Authors/Publisher Year of
No. Publication/
Reprint
1. Nakazawa, H. Principles of Precision Engineering, Oxford University Press, 1994
2. Basics of Precision Engineering, Richard Leach, Stuart T. Smith 2021
3. Nano Technology, Norio Taniguchi, Oxford University Press. 1996
Precision Engineering in Manufacturing, Murthy R. L., New Age International (P) 1996
4.
Limited.
5. Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing, James D. Meadows, Marcel Dekker Inc. 1995
6. Basics of Precision Engineering, Richard Leach, Stuart T. Smith, CRC Press 2021

Course Name : AUTOMOTIVE COMBUSTION AND EMISSIONS

Course Code : MEE1013
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-1-0

Course Objectives:
1 To understand the basics of combustion.
2 To acquire the knowledge of stages of combustion in IC engine.
3 To acquire the knowledge of kinetics of combustion used particularly in combustion chamber design.
4 To understand the formation of pollutants and its mitigation principles

Total No. of Lectures – 42

Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
1 INTRODUCTION: Engine Combustion and Emissions 2
THERMODYNAMICS OF COMBUSTION: Combustion Stoichiometry, Heat of
Reaction, Enthalpy of Formation, Adiabatic Flame Temperature, Equilibrium
2 5
Combustion Products, Unburned Mixtures, Low Temperature Combustion Products,
High Temperature Combustion Products, Chemical Kinetics
COMBUSTION IN SI ENGINES: Premixed Charge Combustion, SI Engine
Combustion Conceptual Models, Combustion Rate Characterization,
3 6
Thermodynamics Analysis of Combustion, Cycle-To-Cycle Combustion Variations,
Knocking Combustion
COMBUSTION IN CI ENGINES: Fuel Injection and Spray Structure, CI Engine
4 Combustion Conceptual Models, Diesel Combustion Process Characterization, 4
Thermodynamic Analysis
ENGINE COMBUSTION SYSTEMS: Fluid Motion in Engine Cylinder, Valve
Arrangement and Variable Valve Actuation, Classification of Engine Combustion
5 Systems, Premixed Homogeneous Charge SI Engines, Direct Injection Stratified 6
Charge Engines, Heterogeneous Charge CI Engines, HCCI/CAI Engines, Engine
Management and Sensors, Laser diagnostic and optical measurement.
FORMATION OF ENGINE EMISSIONS: Emission effect on health and
environment, sources of engine emissions, formation of carbon monoxide, NO
6 formation, unburned hydrocarbon emissions, soot and particulate formation, diesel 5
NOx - particulate trade off, effect of SI engine design and operating variables, effect
of diesel engine design and operating variables.
 EMISSION STANDARDS AND MEASUREMENT: Emission Standards,
7 Emission Test Cycles, Emission Measurement: Instrumentation and Methods, 2
Euro/Bharat Stage norms.
EMISSION CONTROL TECHNOLOGY: SI Engine -Design Parameters, Add-
On Systems for Treatment of Emissions Within Engine, Exhaust After-treatment,
Direct Injection Stratified Charge (DISC) Engines, Summary of SI Engine Emission
8 6
Control. CI Engine - Design Parameters, Application of EGR in CI Engines, Exhaust
After-treatment in Diesel Engines, Summary of Diesel Emission Control, HCCI
Engines for Emission Control.
ENGINE FUELS AND EMISSIONS: Common Hydrocarbon Components,
General Fuel Quality Requirements, Motor Gasoline, Diesel Fuels, Alternative Fuels,
9 antiknock fuels, Alcohols, Natural Gas, Liquefied Petroleum Gas, Biodiesel, Gas-to- 6
Liquid (GTL) Fuels, Dimethyl Ether (DME), Hydrogen, Greenhouse Gas Emissions,
various fuel additives

S. Course outcomes: Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Bloom Level)
Apply the basic concepts of combustion in automotive engine combustion,
1 L2 L3
and understand the emission standards.
2 Interpret the process of combustion in automotive engines. L3
Analyze and examine the combustion process, and measurement techniques, and
3 L4 & L5
challenges.
4 Select the suitable fuel for the current and future needs of the society. L5
5 Design the engines to minimize the emissions with suitable control strategies. L6
CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 1 1
CO2 3 3 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO3 3 2 1 2 - - 2 - - - - - 2 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 - - 3 - - - - - 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 2 - 2 3 - - - - - 3 3

Suggested Books:
Sr. Year of
No. Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
Reprint
1 Internal Combustion Engines Fundamentals, John B. Heywood, McGraw Hill 2000
Science
2 Combustion and Emissions in IC Engines, Murari Mohan Roy (Published 2019
Independently with Amazon)
3 Internal Combustion Engines: Performance, Fuel Economy and Emissions, IMechE, 2013
London, Elsevier.
4 IC Engines: Combustion and emissions, B P Pundir, Alpha Sciences. 2010
Course Name : COMPUTATIONAL FLUID DYNAMICS
Course Code : MEE1014/MEM1003
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-0-2

Course Objectives:
1 To understand mathematical characteristics of partial differential equations.
2 To understand basic properties of computational methods.
To learn computational solution techniques for time integration of ordinary and partial differential
3
equations.
4 To learn to solve computationally the Euler and Navier-Stokes equations
To acquire basic programming and graphic skills to conduct the flow field calculations and data
5
analysis.

Total No. of Lectures – 42

Lecture wise breakup No. of Lectures
INTRODUCTION: CFD and its Applications, Numerical vs Analytical vs
Experimental approach, Modeling Vs Experimentation, Fundamental principles of
1. 4
conservation, Reynolds transport theorem, Principles of mass, momentum and energy
conservation, General scalar transport equation.
PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS AND PHYSICAL BEHAVIOUR:
Mathematical classification of Partial Differential Equation, Illustrative examples of
2. 2
elliptic, parabolic and hyperbolic equations, Applications of elliptic, parabolic and
hyperbolic partial differential equations
ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS: Error Minimization Principles,
Functional involving higher order derivatives, Approximate solution of differential
3 equations through variational formulation, Boundary conditions in the variational 3
form: Primary and secondary variables, Essential and natural boundary conditions,
Approximate solutions of differential equations.
FUNDAMENTALS OF DISCRETIZATION: Pre-processing, Solution, Post-
processing, Finite difference method (FDM), Well posed boundary value problem,
Possible types of boundary conditions, Conservativeness, Boundedness, Transportive
Ness, Finite volume method (FVM), Illustrative examples:1-D steady state heat
4 6
conduction without and with constant source term. 1-D unsteady state diffusion
problems: implicit, fully explicit and Crank-Nicholson scheme. The basic structure of
a CFD code: Pre-processor, Solver and Post-processor, User-defined-subroutines,
Solution to some basic problems in heat transfer and fluid flow.
FINITE VOLUME METHOD: Concepts and Illustrations through 1-D Steady
State Diffusion Problems: Physical consistency, Overall balance, FV Discretization
of a 1-D steady state diffusion-based problem, Composite material with position
dependent thermal conductivity, Source term linearization, Implementation of
boundary conditions. FVM for 2-D unsteady state diffusion problems. Finite volume
5 discretization of convection-diffusion problem: Central difference scheme, Upwind 14
scheme, Exponential scheme and Hybrid scheme, Power law scheme, Generalized
convection-diffusion formulation, Finite volume discretization of two-dimensional
convection-diffusion problem, The concept of false diffusion, QUICK scheme.
Stream Function-Vorticity approach and Primitive variable approach, Staggered grid
and Collocated grid, SIMPLE Algorithm, SIMPLER Algorithm.
DISCRETIZATION OF TIME DEPENDENT DIFFUSION TYPE
6 PROBLEMS: Consequences of time-discretization in finite discretization, 7
Consistency, Stability, Convergence, LAX Equivalence theorem, Grid independent
 and time independent study, Stability analysis of parabolic equations (1-D unsteady
state diffusion problems): Forward time central space (FTCS) scheme, Stability
analysis of parabolic equations (1-Dunsteady state diffusion problems): Central time
central space (CTCS) scheme (Leap frog scheme), Dufort-Frankel scheme, Stability
analysis of hyperbolic equations: FTCS, FTFS, FTBS and CTCS Schemes, Stability
analysis of 2nd order hyperbolic equations: CTCS scheme.
LINEAR ALGEBRAIC EQUATIONS: Criteria for unique solution, infinite
number of solutions and no solution, Solution techniques for systems of linear
algebraic equations: L-U decomposition technique, Tridiagonal matrix algorithm
7 6
(TDMA): Thomas algorithm, Illustrative examples, Iteration methods: Jacobi’s
method and Gauss Siedel method, Illustrative examples of Jacobi’s method and
Gauss-Siedel method, ADI (Alternating direction implicit) method.

List of Experiments No. of Turns

1 Ansys Simulation of lid driven cavity. 2
2 Ansys Simulation of heat transfer and fluid flow through pipe. 2
3 Ansys Simulation of flow past regular and irregular bodies. 2
4 Ansys Simulation of Conduction, Convection and Radiation 2
5 Ansys Simulation of flow through porous media. 3
6 Ansys Simulation of Phase Change Materials 3

Sr. Course outcomes: Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
Understand the use and stepwise procedure to completely solve a fluid flow
1 L1, L2
and heat transfer problem using computational methods.
Develop basic governing equations for fluid flow and heat transfer by
2 L3
examining the physical boundary conditions.
Construct and analyze the consistency, stability and convergence of various
3 discretization schemes of finite difference-based equations according to the L4, L6
nature (i.e. elliptic, parabolic and hyperbolic) of the flow problem.
Predict and implement various implicit and explicit CFD schemes to solve
4 L3, L5
steady and unsteady 1/2/3-dimensional fluid and heat transfer problems.
Analyze and evaluate various finite volume based CFD schemes to solve
5 L3, L5
fluid and heat transfer problems.
Practice CFD software to simulate practical fluid flow and heat transfer
6 L3
problems
CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 3 2 2 1 - - - - - - 1 3 2
CO2 2 3 3 2 1 - - - - - - 1 2 3
CO3 2 2 3 2 1 - - - - - - 1 2 3
CO4 2 2 3 3 2 - - - - - - 1 2 2
CO5 2 2 3 3 2 - - - - - - 1 2 2
CO6 2 2 2 2 3 - - - - 3 - 2 2 3

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
1 Numerical Heat Transfer and Fluid Flow, S. V. Patankar, McGraw-Hill. 2018
 2 Computational Fluid Dynamics, T. J. Chung, Cambridge University Press. 2010
An Introduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics, H. K. Versteeg & W. 2007
3
Malalasekera, 2nded. Longman Scientific &Technical
Computational Methods for Fluid Dynamics, J. H. Ferziger and M. Peric, 3 rd ed. 2002
4
Springer
Computational Fluid Mechanics and Heat Transfer, John C. Tannehill, Dale A. 2016
5
Anderson and Richard H. Pletcher, 3rd ed., Taylor & Francis
6 Computational Fluid Dynamics, John D. Anderson Jr, McGraw Hill Book Company 2017
Computational Fluid Dynamics: Principles and Applications, J. Blazek, 3rd ed. 2015
7
Elsevier.

Course Name : INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION

Course Code : MEE1028
Credits : 4
LT P : 3-0-2

Course Objectives:
1 To understand the principles, strategies and advantages of industrial automation.
2 To impart the knowledge about PLC programming for a given task.
3 To demonstrates problem-solving skills in automation with circuits design.
4 To impart the knowledge about the practical methods of automatic control of advance machines,
critical processes and systems.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
AUTOMATION: Concepts, Need and Demand of automation, Current and future
Trends, Components of Industrial Automation System and their functionalities, Levels
6
1 and Types of Automation, Mechanization vs Automation, strategies of automation,
Current emphasis in automation.
AUTOMATION CONTROLLERS: Introduction of Industrial Controllers,
Programmable Logic Controller: Constructions, Types, Programming Units, Memory,
I/O Modules, Programming methodology, Ladder Logic programming and diagrams, 6
2 timers, internal relays and counters, data handling, analogue input and output.
Application on real time industrial automation systems.
LOGIC CONTROL CIRCUITS FOR HYDRAULICS AND PNEUMATICS:
Basic elements of hydraulics and pneumatics, fluid power control elements and standard
graphical symbols, hydraulic & pneumatic cylinders and valves for pressure, flow &
6
direction control, Circuit design approach and real time examples, sequence operation of
3
two and more than two cylinders, Hydraulic and pneumatic safety and
their applications in clamping, traversing and releasing operations.
INDUSTRIAL CONTROL SYSTEM: Process versus discrete manufacturing,
continuous versus discrete control, computer process control, forms of computer process
6
4 control, closed loop versus open loop control, design of control systems, levels
of automation in industries, variables and parameters in industries.
ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC CONTROL: Sensor Terminology,
classification of sensor and transducer, their selection, temperature, light, position,
6
5 piezoelectric, pressure and vision sensors, acoustic emission sensing techniques,
microprocessor, microcontroller.
 FACTORY AUTOMATION: Fundamentals of production lines, types of assembly
lines, reasons for using automated assembly lines, transfer systems in assembly lines,
automatic machines, transfer devices and machines, selection of transfer devices, linear
6
and rotary transfer mechanism, classification, conveyors, Feeders: classification,
6
selection criterion, feeding devices, Types of feeders: reciprocating, vibratory, screw,
rotary, centrifugal, flexible, Automated guided vehicles.
MATERIAL HANDLING SYSTEMS AND DESIGN: Introduction to Material
Handling, Material Transport Equipment, analysis of Material Transport Systems,
Storage systems, Storage System Performance and Location Strategies, Conventional 6
7 Storage Methods and Equipment, Automation Storage Systems, Engineering Analysis
of Storage Systems.

Sr. Experiments
No. of Turns
No.
Students in a group will carry out projects on design and implementation of an automatic
modular system which can be useful in contemporary automation industries. The
1 methodologies will be followed the design and simulation of automated systems using 14
software and implementation via pneumatic controls, electro-pneumatic controls,
PLC and motion controls in Simens CoE Labs, PEC, Chandigarh.

Sr. Course outcomes: Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Understand the concept, need and demand of automation. L2
2 Apply the principles, strategies and advantages of automation. L3
3 Select the level and types of factory automation. L3
4 Categories the material handling system for modern automated industry. L4
Justify the uses of various automation controllers in real life time industrial
5 L5
application.
Design the logic control circuits for hydraulics and pneumatics operated
6 L6
automation systems.
CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 1 1 1 - - 1 - - - - 1 2 1
CO2 3 3 2 2 - - 2 - - - - 1 3 1
CO3 3 2 2 1 - - 2 - - - - 1 3 2
CO4 2 3 2 3 2 - 2 - - - 2 1 3 3
CO5 1 2 2 3 2 1 - - - - 1 1 1 2
CO6 1 2 3 2 2 1 1 - - - - 1 2 3

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
Automation production Systems and Computer Integrated Manufacturing, Groover,
1 2009
M.P., Pearson Education
2 Computer Based Industrial Control, Krishna Kant, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi. 2010
3 Mechatronics, W. Bolton, 5th ed., Addison Wesley Longman Ltd 2010
An Introduction to Automated Process planning Systems, Tiess Chiu Chang and
4 2000
Richard A.W., Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing company, New Delhi
5 Automated Manufacturing Systems, Morriss, S. B., McGraw Hill. 2006
Advanced Industrial Automation and Its Applications, Ravindra Sharma, Laxmi
6 2021
Publications Pvt Ltd
Department Elective Courses-III
Course Name : FINITE ELEMENT METHOD IN ENGINEERING
Course Code : MEE1015
Credits : 4
LTP : 3-0-2

Course Objectives:
To learn basic principles of finite element method as a numerical tool in engineering analysis& design
1
procedure.
2 To learn the theory and modeling of finite elements that represent engineering structures.
To learn finite element solutions to structural & dynamic problems through hands-on and simulation
3
exercises.
To impart the knowledge and skills needed to effectively evaluate and interpret finite element
4
analysis.

Total No. of Lectures – 42

Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
INTRODUCTION: Introduction to FEM and historical background, Brief overview of
the steps used in FEM, Various approaches to formulate elemental equations, Difference
among FEM, FDM and closed form solutions, Need to study FEM, Review of the
1 concept of stresses, strains, displacements and their relations, Von-Mises stresses, 6
equilibriums, boundary conditions, temperature effect, Concept and application of
Minimum Potential energy method, Rayleigh Ritz method, Galerkin Method and
Principle of Virtual Work as applied to elasticity problems.
MATRIX ALGEBRA & GAUSS ELIMINATION METHOD: Matrix algebra and its
different operations, Special feature of matrix algebra useful to FEM, Eigen values and
2 2
Eigen vectors, Positive definite matrix, Gauss elimination method to solve large linear
equations.
1-D PROBLEMS: Introduction, finite element modelling using bar element, shape
functions, Iso, super and sub parametric FEM formulation, Potential energy approach to
solve 1-D problems, assembly of elemental equations, Properties of global stiffness
3 8
matrix, types and applications of boundary conditions, higher order 1-D element and
their shape functions, its application to 1-D problem, Accounting of temperature effect
in 1-D problems.
TRUSSES PROBLEMS: Introduction, 2-D and 3-D trusses, concept of local and
4 global coordinate system and its transformation matrix, solution of 2-D and 3-D trusses, 4
stress calculations, Accounting of the temperature effect.
2-D PROBLEMS USING CONSTANT STRAIN TRIANGLES (CST): Introduction,
finite element modelling using CST elements and shape functions, Potential energy
5 6
approach, solution of 2-D problems, Accounting of temperature effect, Problem
modelling and boundary conditions for symmetrical problems, orthotropic materials.
2-D ISO-PARAMATRIC ELEMENTS AND NUMERICAL INTEGRATION:
Introduction, Four-noded quadrilateral element-based FE Modelling and its solution,
6 Numerical integration, Concept of weights and Gauss points and its values, Formulae, 2- 6
D & 3-D numerical integration and applications, Higher order quadrilateral and
triangular elements and it’s numerical integration.
BEAMS AND FRAMES: Introduction, Potential energy-based FE formulation using
7 beam and frame elements, Boundary consideration, shear stress and bending moment, 6
beams on elastic supports, plane frames, 3-D frames.
DYNAMIC PROBLEMS: Introduction, mass matrix as used in the FEM, elemental
8 mass matrix for different types of elements as studied above, Evaluation of Eigen values 4
and Eigen vectors.
Sr. List of experiments No. of
No. Turns
1. Static Structural analysis of plane frame using FEA software. 1
2. Static Structural analysis of cantilever beam using FEA software. 1
3. Static Structural analysis of plate with a hole using FEA software. 1
4. Static Structural analysis of a stepped shaft in axial tension using FEA software. 1
5. Static Structural analysis of bike crank using FEA software. 1
6. Static Structural analysis of a four-point bend test on a T-beam using FEA software.
7. Static Structural analysis of three-dimensional analysis of combined loading in a
1
signpost using FEA software.
8. Static Structural analysis of planar approximations for a two-dimensional beam using
1
FEA software.
9. Static Structural analysis of a non-slender cantilever beam under point tip loading
1
using FEA software.
10. Static Structural analysis of Hoop and axial stresses in thick-walled pressure vessels
1
using FEA software.
11. Optimization of plate with a hole using FEA software. 1
12. Modal Analysis of cantilever Beam using FEA software. 1
13. Modal Analysis of a Wing using FEA software. 1
14. 2D Steady Conduction analysis for a Rectangular Domain using FEA software. 1

Knowledge Level
Course outcomes: After successful completion of this course, students will be able to (Blooms
Level)
1. Apply the concepts behind various formulation methods used in FEM. L3
2. Identify and select suitable type of elements for a problems and generation of global L1 & L5
equations.
3. Identify and apply boundary conditions to global equations and to solve these equations. L1 & L3
4. Interpret the output of FEM based software in more meaningful manner. L2

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 3 1 3 3 - - - 2 2 1 2 2 3
CO2 3 3 1 2 - - - - 1 1 1 - 3 1
CO3 3 2 2 1 - - - - 1 1 1 - 3 1
CO4 2 3 2 3 3 - - - 1 1 1 - 3 1

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication
No.
/ Reprint
Introduction to Finite Elements in Engineering, Chandrupatala & Belegundu, 4th ed.,
1 2015
Pearson.
2 Finite Element Method, J. N. Reddy, 2nd ed., McGraw Hill. 1993
3 Concept & Application of Finite Element Analysis, Cook et al., 4th Ed., John Wiley. 2004
4 The Finite Element Method for Engineers, Huebner et al., 3rd ed, John Wiley. 1982
Finite Element Analysis (Theory & programming), C. S. Krisnamoorthy, 2nd ed., Tata
5 2017
McGraw Hill.
Course Name : HYDRAULIC AND PNEUMATIC CONTROL DESIGN
Course Code : MEE1016/MEO1002
Credits : 4
LT P : 3-1-0

Course Objectives:
1 To provide an insight into the capabilities of hydraulic and pneumatic fluid power.
To understand the concepts and relationships surrounding force, pressure, energy and power in fluid
2
power systems.
To examine concepts centering on sources of hydraulic power, rotary and linear actuators, distribution
3
systems, hydraulic flow in pipes, and control components in fluid power systems.
To provide the exposure to build and interpret hydraulic and pneumatic circuits related to industrial
4
applications.
5 To familiarize with logic controls and trouble shooting.

Total No. of Lectures – 42

Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
BASIC PNEUMATIC AND HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS: Introduction and basic
elements of fluid power system, their structure, advantages and limitation, Applications
of fluid power, pneumatic vs hydraulics control systems, Properties of fluids for
8. hydraulic systems and governing laws, review of pneumatics in distribution of fluid 5
power, Structure and signal flow of hydraulic and pneumatic system, Basic types and
constructions of hydraulic pumps, motors and compressors, Air generation and
distribution, Processing elements, Power components.
FLUID ACCESSORIES: Air receiver, after-cooler, Air Dryer, Air Filter, Pressure
Regulator, Air Lubricator, Air Service Unit, Pipeline layout, Seals, Hydraulic fluids,
9. 5
Hydraulic reservoir, Hydraulic filter, Hydraulic Accumulator, Intensifier, Pressure
gauges and Volume Meters, Lines, Fitting and Connectors, Hydraulic seals.
ACTUATORS AND OUTPUT DEVICES: Cylinders, Classification of cylinders on
the basis of construction, Single and Double acting cylinders, their types, Classification
of cylinders on the basis of working Medium: hydraulic and Pneumatic, rod-less
cylinders, Cylinder construction, mounting arrangement Construction and working of
10. 5
rotary actuators such as gear, vane, piston and hydraulic motors. Theoretical torque,
power, flow-rate, hydraulic motor performance, Symbolic representation of actuators
(cylinders and motors), Cylinder performance characteristics, Symbols of Motors,
Classification of fluid motors.
CONTROL ELEMENTS: Classification of the valves, Direction Control valves,
Poppet valves, Function of a 3/2-way NC and NO poppet valve, Manual and
Mechanical operation of poppet valves, Mini poppet valves, 3/2-way and 5/2-way spool
valves, Manual and mechanical operating devices for spool valves, Pneumatic operating
devices for the valves , Directly operated solenoid valves , Servo solenoid valves with
11. 8
internal pilot and external pilot, Three-position valves, Blocking valves: Unidirectional,
bidirectional, Signal processing valves, Nominal flow rate, Sizing of directional control
distribution valves and connecting tubes, Interception valves, Non return, Flow and
Pressure valves, Valve combination, Quick exhaust valve, Time delay Valve/Air Timer,
Pneumatic Logic Valves, Twin Pressure valve, Shuttle Valve, Symbolic representation.
 DESIGN OF HYDRAULIC CONTROL CIRCUIT: Symbols and description of
components, Rules for designing circuits, Control chain, design of circuit diagram,
circuit layout, designation of individual elements, Single or semi-automatic cycle,
Continuous or automatic cycle, Elementary circuits, Signals generated by limit switches,
Hydraulic circuit for control of single acting and double acting cylinder, Speed control
12. in hydraulic circuits, Bleed of circuit, Regenerative circuit, Sequencing circuit, 6
hydraulic circuit for force multiplication, speed control of hydraulic cylinder- metering
in, metering out and bleed off circuits, Pilot pressure operated circuits, Hydraulic circuit
with accumulator, counter balance valve application, Memory valves, Timer, Cycle start
command, Single and continuous cycle, Emergency
command pressure reduction circuit, problems in circuit design.
DESIGN OF PNEUMATIC CONTROL CIRCUIT: Pneumatic Circuits for control
of single acting and double acting cylinder, Simple Pneumatic Control: Direct and
indirect actuation pneumatic cylinders, speed control of cylinders, supply air and
exhaust air throttling, Circuit with mechanical feedback, Use of flow control valve and
Quick exhaust valve, Time delay circuit, Circuit with necessary conditions, Application
13. 7
of Twin pressure and Shuttle valve, Signal Processing Elements: Use of Logic gates,
OR and AND gates in pneumatic application, Practical examples involving the use of
logic gates, Electro-Pneumatic Control: Principles, signal input
and output, pilot assisted solenoid control of directional control valves, use of relay and
contactors, Control circuitry for simple signal cylinder application.
CONTROL SYSTEMS: Open and closed loop control system, Selection and
comparison of working and control media, Control Theory, Control system
14. development: Positional sketch, Displacement, step diagram, Control Chart, Function 6
Diagram, Function chart, Circuit diagram, Cascade Design, Steps involved in cascade
design, Sign Conventions, Development aspects, Emergency control.

Sr. Course outcomes: Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Recall basic elements of fluid mechanics and logic gates L1
Identify and analyze the functional requirements of a fluid power
2 L2 & L4
transmission system for a given application.
Understand the working of hydraulic/pneumatic circuit to accomplish the
3 L2
desired function.
Design an appropriate hydraulic/pneumatic/combination circuit like electro-
4 L6
hydraulics, electro-pneumatics for a given application.
5 Select and standardize the different components of the circuit. L5
6 Apply the control systems development techniques in industrial applications. L3
CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 1 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO2 2 3 3 2 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO3 3 3 2 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO6 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
1 Fundamentals of Fluid Power Control, John Watton, Cambridge University press. 2012
2 Hydraulics and Pneumatics, Andrew Par, Jaico Publishing House. 2005
3 Fluid Power with Applications, Anthony Esposito, Pearson. 2000
4 Introduction to Fluid Power, Thomson, Prentice Hall. 2004
Pneumatic systems – Principles and Maintenance, Majumdar S.R., Tata Mc-Graw
5 2005
Hill, New Delhi.
6 Oil Hydraulics, S. R. Majumdar, Tata Mc-Graw Hill. 2017

Course Name : AUTOMOTIVE ENGINEERING

Course Code : MEE1017/MEO1004
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-0-2

Course Objectives:
1 To develop an understanding of all the sub-components of an automotive vehicle.
2 To give knowledge about all the controlling and electronic components.
3 To gain the knowledge about new technologies being used in automotive vehicles.
Total No. of Lectures – 42

Lecture wise breakup No. of

Lectures
INTRODUCTION: History of Automotive engineering, Classification of
Automotive vehicles, Different sub-systems in automotive vehicles, History of hybrid
1 2
electric, electric and fuel cell vehicles, social and environmental importance of hybrid
electric, electric and fuel cell vehicles.
COOLING AND LUBRICATION SYSTEMS: Cooling systems and its
components for conventional and EV, anti-freeze mixtures. Lubrication purpose and
2 various systems of lubrication, types and desirable properties of lubricants, 5
components like oil filters, oil pumps, and oil pressure indicators, air supply system,
air filters, turbo charger and super charger.
FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEMS: Fuel injection system for petrol and diesel engines,
fuel pumps (mechanical and electrical), air fuel ratio requirements, carburetors: types
3 5
and general operation throttle body and multipoint fuel injection systems, electronic
control module and sensing devices.
TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS: Clutch function and types, torque converters; fluid
flywheel; manual and automatic transmission/ trans axles; constant mesh & synchro-
mesh gearboxes, epi-cyclic gearbox, differential, propeller shafts and universal joint
front and rear axles.
Basic concept of electric traction and architecture, Topologies for electric drive-train
4 and their analysis, Drive cycle implications and fuel efficiency estimations and well 4
to wheel fuel efficiency analysis, Sizing of components for different electric drive
train topologies.
Matching the electric drive and ICE, Transmission selection and gear step selection,
Sizing the propulsion motor, its torque, constant power speed ratio and machine
dimensions,
BRAKE SYSTEMS, WHEEL & TYRES: Braking efficiency and stopping
5 distances. Types of brakes, Drum and disc brakes. Detailed description of hydraulic 5
and pneumatic brake. Mechanical, vacuum and electrical methods of brake actuation,
 servo brakes, ABS, type of wheels, tyres, type of tyres; cross ply, radial tubeless etc.
specification of tyres, Supporting system for EV braking system
SUSPENSION SYSTEM: Road springs, shock absorbers, independent suspension,
6 4
road springs, air suspension, hydro-elastic suspension.
STEERING SYSTEM: Steering geometry, details, correct steering angle, Ackerman
steering mechanism. Cornering power, over steering and under steering. Worm wheel
7 5
and Rack pinion types of steering gears. Safety steering columns, power steering,
Supporting system for EV steering system.
IGNITION SYSTEM: Various ignition systems ( coil and magneto) and detailed
8 4
study of their components, electronic ignition system, distributor less ignition system
ENERGY STORAGE SYSTEM: Storage battery (lead acid type), Maintenance free
batteries, various components, Charging system, Li-ion battery based energy storage
9 and simplified models of battery, Fuel cells, their characteristics and simplified 4
models, Super capacitor based energy storage, its analysis and simplified models, its
advantages and challenges.
EMISSION CONTROL AND ACCESSORIES: Emission norm like EURO and
BHARAT norms, methods and devices to control emissions; Automotive accessories,
10 4
controlling devices such as fuel gauge, temperature gauge, indicator lights
speedometer odometer, HVAC etc.

List of Experiments No. of Turns

To study and prepare report on the constructional details, working principles and 2
1 operation of the Automotive Engine Systems & Sub Systems.
To study and prepare report on the constructional details, working principles and 1
2 operation of the Fuels supply systems.
To study and prepare report on the constructional details, working principles and 1
3
operation of the conventional and EV Clutches.
To study and prepare report on the constructional details, working principles and 2
4 operation of the conventional and EV Transmission systems.
To study and prepare report on the constructional details, working principles and 2
5
operation of the conventional and EV Drive Lines & Differentials.
To study and prepare report on the constructional details, working principles and 1
6
operation of the conventional and EV Suspension Systems.
To study and prepare report on the constructional details, working principles and 2
7
operation of the conventional and EV Steering Systems.
To study and prepare report on the constructional details, working principles and 1
8
operation of the conventional and EV Tyres & wheels.
To study and prepare report on the constructional details, working principles and 1
9
operation of the conventional and EV Brake systems.
To study and prepare report on the constructional details, working principles and 1
10
operation of conventional Automotive Emission / Pollution control systems.

Knowledge
Sr. Course outcomes: Level
No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms
Level)
Realize the need and importance of study of automobile engineering for mechanical L4
1
engineers.
Identify and compare the relative merits, demerits and applications of different L3, L4
2
systems and components in an Automobile.
Explain working of IC engines (Gasoline and Diesel) and various parameters related L5
3
to it.
4 Classify and illustrate various elements of Automobile like, Transmission, Brakes, L2, L4
 Suspension, and Steering etc.
Explain recent advancements in field of Automobile engineering, like, Electric L2
5
Vehicles, Hybrid Vehicles, CRDI engines, ABS etc.
Explain and illustrate various emission and safety regulations along with their L5
6
importance in automobile engineering.
CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 1 2 - - - - - - - - 2 1 1
CO2 3 1 2 - - - - - - - - 2 2 2
CO3 3 1 2 - - - - - - - - 2 1 1
CO4 3 1 2 - - - - - - - - 2 2 1
CO5 3 1 2 - - - - - - - - 2 2 2
CO6 3 1 1 - - 3 - - - - - 2 1 2

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
Automobile Engg., Kirpal Singh, Standard Publication distributors, Delhi Vol. I &
1 2020
Vol. II
Encyclopaedia of Automotive Engineering, D. Crolla, D. E. Foster, T. Kobayashi and
2 2015
N. Vaughan (Editors-in-Chief), Parts 1-6, Wiley
3 Automotive Engineering Fundamentals, R. Stone and J. K. Ball, SAE International. 2004
The Motor Vehicle, T. K. Garrett, K. Newton, and W. Steeds, 13th ed., SAE
4 2001
International.
5 Internal Combustion Engines, V. Ganesan, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill. 2017
Modern Electric, Hybrid Electric and Fuel Cell Vehicles: Fundamentals, Theory and
6 2010
Design, M. Ehsani, Y. Gao and A. Emadi, 2nd Edition, CRC Press.
Car Suspension and Handling, D. B. Astow, G. Howard and J. P. Whitehead, 4th ed.,
7 2004
SAE International.
8 James Larminie, John Lowry, Electric Vehicle Technology Explained, Wiley 2012

Course Name : WORK STATION DESIGN AND NEURO-ERGONOMICS

Course Code : MEE1018/MEO1001
Credits : 4
L T P : 310

Course Objectives:
This course is designed to teach the fundamentals of Designing of Ergonomically correct Work
1
Stations
To study latest techniques used in the evaluation of human work in all contexts that leads
2 systematically to the investigation of all the factors which affect the efficiency and economy of human
energy at the work place
It helps in designing and improvement in the methods and procedures which are most effective,
3
require the least efforts and are the best suited to the industrial workers.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
S. Contents No. of
No. Lectures
WORK STUDY FUNDAMENTALS: Definitions, Scope and applications,
1 3
Productivity and Work Study, Analysis of Work Content, Introduction to Industrial
 Engineering and Productivity, Measurement tools of productivity.
METHOD STUDY: Process Analysis, Process and Activity Charts, Operation
2 5
Analysis, Basic Procedure, Micro Motion Study, Principles of Motion Economy.
WORK MEASUREMENT: Purposes and Uses, Basic Procedure, Techniques:
Work Sampling, Rating and Allowances, Setting Standard Times for Jobs, Standard
3 8
Data, Predetermined Motion Time Systems, MTM, Work factor and MOST, Job
Evaluation of Merit Rating, Wage Incentive Plans.
ERGONOMICS AND RISK ASSESSMENT: Concepts, Issues in Work System
Design, Measuring Work by Physiological Means, Work Posture, Fatigue
4 Measurement & Evaluation, Work Systems, Limitation of Man & Machine with 8
respect to each other by risk assessment techniques such as RULA, REBA, OCRA,
NIOSH, SI, PLIBEL, QEC and OWAS.
WORK LOAD MEASUREMENT: Human Motor Activity, Anatomy of human
muscles and brain lobes, Metabolism, Physical and Mental Work load and their
Measurement, Introduction to work related musculoskeletal disorders and mental
5 fatigue, Introduction to Neuro-ergonomics and quantification of neuro-signals from 10
electro-encephalography and electromyography by linear and non-linear techniques
with respect to work duration and rest periods, Introduction to Digital Human
Modelling Techniques.
CLIMATES AND NOISE EVALUATION: Heat Humidity: Body heat Balance,
Effective Temperature Scales, Zones of Discomfort, Effects of Heat on Body and
Work Performance, Vibration: Response of Body to Low Frequency Vibration,
Vibrations and Discomfort, Effect on Health of Worker, Effect of High Frequency
6 8
Vibrations, Methods of Reducing Vibrations, Analysis, Noise: Physiological Effects
of Noise, Annoyance of Noise, Speed Interference, Hearing Loss, Temporary and
Permanent Threshold Shift, Effect of Noise on Performance, Reduction of Noise,
Personal Noise Protection.

Knowledge Level
Course outcomes: By the end of this course, the student will be able to:
(Blooms Level)
Assess all industrial activities with respect to motion study and there by design work
1 L5 & L6
stations.
Quantification of physical and mental work load of the workers by latest
2 L5
neurological techniques.
3 Identify and assess the environmental and climatic working conditions in industry. L2 & L5
Analyze and apply different risk assessment techniques to predict risk involved in
4 L3 & L4
work with respect to development of musculoskeletal disorders.
Application of all latest time study techniques to calculate standard time to carry-out
5 L3
any industrial job.
CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 3 3 3 1 2 - - - - 1 1 2 1
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - 1 1 2 1
CO3 2 3 3 2 - 2 2 - - - 1 1 1 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 - 2 - - - - 1 1 2 1
CO5 3 3 2 3 - - - - - - 1 1 1 1

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
1 Motion and Time Study, Design and Measurement of Work, Ralph M. Barnes, 2009
 Wiley India.
2 Neuro-Ergonomics, Raja Parasuraman & Mathew Rizzo, Oxford University Press. 2007
Handbook of Digital Human Modelling, Vincent G. Duffy, CRC Press Taylor &
3 2009
Francis Group.
Ergonomics Laboratory Exercises, Timothy Joseph Gallwey & Leonard William O’
4 2010
Sullivan, CRC Press Taylor & Francis Group.
International Standard Manual of Ergonomics, Part-1: Lifting and Carrying; Part-2:
5 2009
Pushing and Pulling, Part-3: Handling of Low Loads at High Frequency.
6 Neuroergonomics: Principles and Practice, Chang S. Nam, Springer 2020

Course Name : EXPERIMENTAL STRESS ANALYSIS

Course Code : MEE1019
Credits : 4
LTP : 3-1/2-2/2

Course Objectives: To understand the

1.Relation between the theory of solid mechanics with experimental stress analysis.
2.Principles of photo elasticity in stress analysis.
3.Fundamental concepts about the experimental methods of stress analysis.
4.Use the experimental stress techniques on the practical problems.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
INTRODUCTION: Stress at a point on an arbitrary plane in 3-D state of stress,
differential equations of equilibrium, Laws of stress transformation, principal stresses
and maximum shear stress, 2-D state of stress, displacement and strain, principal
1 6
strains, compatibility conditions, stress-strain relations, Plane stress and plane strain
problems, boundary conditions, Mohr’s circle and stress plane, Three-dimensional
stress-strain relations.
BASIC OPTICS: Basic concept and nature of light, polarization, decomposition of
elliptically polarized light, passage of light through isotropic media and crystalline
2 medium, normal incidence and oblique incidence, optic axis in refracting surface, 4
absolute and relative phase difference, quarter and half wave plates, production of
plane polarized light, light ellipse characteristics.
2-DIMENSIONAL PHOTOELASTICITY: Stress optics law, plane and circular
polariscopes, isochromatics and isoclinics, white light and monochromatic light source,
analysis of plane and circular polariscopes through trigonometric resolutions and Jones
3 7
Calculus method, dark and bright field arrangement of circular polariscopes, isoclinics
and isochromatics fringe order at a point, methods of compensation, calibration
methods, use of white light in Photoelasticity, reversibility of optical system.
PHOTOELASTIC DATA COLLECTION, ANALYSIS AND APPLICATIONS:
Photoelastic data, stress components, stress separation techniques and applications,
4 3
properties of an ideal photoelastic material, casting technique, machining of
photoelastic casting, stress relieving, 2-D and 3-D applications.
BIREFRINGENT COATING METHOD: Theory of Birefringent coatings,
5 reflection polariscope, sensitivity of Birefringent coating, separation of principal 4
stresses, sources of errors, Birefringent coating materials and applications.
MOIRÉ-FRINGEMETHODS AND ANALYSIS: Mechanism of formation of Moiré
fringes, geometrical approach to Moiré-Fringe analysis, displacement field approach to
6 Moiré-Fringe analysis for in-plane and out of plane pr obl em s , out of plane slope 4
measurements, sharpening and multiplication of Moiré-Fringes, experimental
procedure and techniques.
 BRITTLE COATING METHODS: Brittle coating materials, Relation between the
state of stress in coating and in the model, law of failure of brittle coatings and
7 interpretation of crack-pattern data, Isostatics and Isoentatics, relative merits of stress 4
coat and all temperature coating, Accuracy of brittle coating application, crack
detection techniques, calibration of brittle coating materials.
STRAIN MEASUREMENT: Classification and brief over-view of the strain
measurement devices, Electrical resistance strain gauge and types, gauge materials,
8 backing material of strain gauge, adhesives used, bonding of strain gauge, checking 6
accuracy of bonding, performance of strain gauge, strain gauge circuits, strain gauge
rosettes.
DIGITIZATION OF PHOTOELASTICITY: Basic concepts and methodologies of
digitization in photoelasticity, formulation of problems and applications, data
9 4
acquisition by digital image processing techniques, data analysis by statistical
techniques, data presentation by computer graphics.

List of experiments No. of Turns

Students shall be practicing to solve the engineering problems using photo-elastic bench and
7
other experimental methods of stress analysis.

Sr. Course outcomes: Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Evaluate stresses and strains by experimental methods. L5
2 Elucidate the isoclinics and other fringe multiplication techniques. L1, L2
3 Use experimental stress analysis methods including Moiré method etc. L3, L5
4 Acquire the knowledge on brittle and birefringent coatings and working of L2, L4
strain gauges.

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO2 3 3 3 1 - - - - - - - - 3 1
CO3 3 2 2 1 - - - - - - - - 3 1
CO4 2 3 2 3 - - - - - - - - 3 1

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
Experimental Stress Analysis, L S Srinath, MR Raghavan, K Lingaiah, G Gargesha, B
1 1984
Pant, K Ramachandra, Tata McGraw Hill.
Experimental Stress Analysis, Dally, J.W. and Riley, W.F, 3rd ed., McGraw Hill
2 1991
Education.
e-book on Experimental Stress Analysis: K Ramesh, Published by IIT Madras, India,
4 2009
URL: http://apm.iitm.ac.in/smlab/kramesh/book_5.htm
5 Photoelastic Stress Analysis, Kuske A and G Robertson, John Wiley & Sons, London. 1974
Digital Photoelasticity - Advanced technique and application, K Ramesh, Springer-
6 2000
Verlag.
7 Experimental Stress Analysis, UC Jindal, Pearson 2012
Applications and Techniques for Experimental Stress Analysis, Karthik Selva Kumar
8 2019
Karuppasamy, Balaji P.S, Business Science Reference
Course Name : MECHANICS OF COMPOSITE MATERIALS
Course Code : MEE1020
Credits : 4
LTP : 3-1-0

Course Objectives:
1.To acquire basic understanding of composites materials.
2.To develop an understanding of themacro & micro mechanical analysis of a lamina.
3.To develop an understanding of the micromechanical analysis of laminates.
4.To impart the knowledge about the failure analysis and design of laminates.

Total No. of Lectures – 42

Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
INTRODUCTION TO COMPOSITE MATERIALS: Introduction and Need of
composite materials, Classification of composite materials: Polymer Matrix
1 Composites, Metal Matrix Composites, Ceramic Matrix Composites, Carbon– 6
Carbon Composites, Characteristics of reinforcements and Matrix Materials,
Recycling Fiber-Reinforced Composites, Mechanics Terminology.
MACRO MECHANICAL ANALYSIS OF A LAMINA: Definitions, Stress,
Strain, Elastic Moduli, Strain Energy, Hooke’s Law for Different Types of Materials,
Hooke’s Law for a 2-D Unidirectional Lamina, Reduction of Hooke’s Law from 3-D
to 2-D, Relationship of Compliance and Stiffness Matrix to Engineering Elastic
Constants of a Lamina, Hooke’s Law for a 2-D Angle Lamina, Invariant Form of
2 11
Stiffness and Compliance Matrices for an Angle Lamina, Failure Theories of an
Angle Lamina: Maximum Stress Failure Theory, Strength Ratio, Failure Envelopes,
Maximum Strain Failure Theory, Tsai-Hill Failure Theory, Tsai–Wu Failure Theory,
Comparison of Experimental Results with Failure theories. Hygrothermal Stresses
and Strains in a unidirectional and angle Lamina.
MICRO-MECHANICAL ANALYSIS OF A LAMINA: Introduction, Volume
and Mass Fractions, Density, Void Content, Evaluation of the Four Elastic Moduli:
Strength of Materials Approach, Semi-Empirical Models, Elasticity Approach and
Elastic Moduli of Lamina with Transversely Isotropic Fibers for various types of
3 10
modulus, Ultimate Strengths of a Unidirectional Lamina for tensile, longitudinal
compressive, transverse compressive and in-plane shear, Longitudinal and transverse
Thermal Expansion Coefficients, Thermo-elastic Deformation Analysis, Coefficients
of Moisture Expansion.
MICROMECHANICAL ANALYSIS OF LAMINATES: Introduction, Laminate
Code, Stress–Strain Relations for a Laminate, One-Dimensional Isotropic Beam,
Stress-Strain Relation, Strain-Displacement Equations, Strain and Stress in a
4 Laminate, Force and Moment Resultants Related to Mid-plane Strains and 9
Curvatures, In-Plane and Flexural Modulus of a Laminate, Hygrothermal Effects in a
Laminate like Hygrothermal Stresses and Strains, Coefficients of Thermal and
Moisture Expansion of Laminates, Warpage of Laminates.
FAILURE ANALYSIS AND DESIGN OF LAMINATES: Introduction, Special
Cases of Laminates: Symmetric Laminates, Cross-Ply Laminates, Angle Ply
Laminates, Anti-symmetric Laminates, Balanced Laminate, Quasi-Isotropic
5 Laminates, Failure Criterion for a Laminate, Design of a Laminated Composites, 6
Other Mechanical Design Issues, Sandwich Composites, Long-Term Environmental
Effects, Inter-laminar Stresses, Impact Resistance, Fracture Resistance, Fatigue
Resistance.
Sr. Course outcomes: Knowledge Level
No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Recall the basics of Solid Mechanics. L1
Understand the mechanical properties of various commercial composite
2 L2
materials.
Analyze and evaluate the mechanical properties of Lamina at Macro and
3 Micro level. L4 & L5
4 Analyze and evaluate the mechanical properties of Laminates at Micro level. L4 & L5
Develop a methodology for stress and progressive failure analysis of
5 laminated composite structures to apply in aerospace, automobile, marine and L3 & L6
other engineering applications.

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PSO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1
2
CO1 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO2 2 2 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO3 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 - - 2 - - - - 1 3 1

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
1 Mechanics of Composite Materials, Autar K. Kaw, 2nded., CRC Press. 2006
2 Mechanics of Composite Materials, Jones. R. M., Taylor & Francis Press 1999
3 Composite Material Science and Engineering, K.K. Chawla,3rd ed., Springer. 2012
Engineering Mechanics of Composite Materials, I.M. Daniel, O. Ishai, Oxford
4 2006
University Press.
Analysis and Performance of Fiber Composites, B D Agarwal, L J Broutman, John
5 1995
Wiley and Sons. Inc., New York.
Stress analysis of fiber Reinforced Composite Materials, Michael W, Hyer, McGraw
6 2009
Hill International.
Composite Materials: Mechanics, Manufacturing and Modelling, Sumit Sharma,
7 2021
CRC Press

Course Name : PRODUCTION PLANNING & CONTROL

Course Code : MEE1021
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-1-0

Course Objectives: To impart the knowledge about the:

1. Concept and significance of Production planning & control.
2. Plant capacity, location, layout and its applications.
3. Routing, Scheduling, Purchasing and Dispatching.
4. New trends in operations management used in industries.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
lectures
INTRODUCTION: Objectives of production planning and control, functions and
1 4
its advantages, types of controls and procedures.
 PLANNING: Capacity planning, types of capacity plans, factors affecting the plant
capacity, capacity planning strategies, investment decisions, comparison of
2 alternatives, planning for making or buying, types of plans, mathematical planning 8
techniques, analysis of machine capacity, planning for labour, aggregate production
planning.
ROUTING: Definition, routing procedure including bills of materials, route sheet,
route file, routing for two or more items, standard route chart and recent techniques
3 of routing. 8
SCHEDULING: Master schedule, departmental and shop schedule charts for
scheduling, Gantt chart, loading and scheduling.
PURCHASING AND STORING: Planning for purchasing, procurement
schedule, purchase requisition, calling tenders, comparative statements, placing
orders, receiving materials, inspection entry and payment, foreign purchase:
4 6
imports, documents and books. Location and layout of store-room, bins, racks, bar-
codes and boxes used in storing, centralized and decentralized stores, functions of
stores.
DISPATCHING: Procedure, types, MIS systems for department and shop, bulletin
5 boards, move tickets, operation tickets, machine control boards, inspection ticket, 4
time ticket, communication systems for dispatching, follow up.
PLANT LAYOUT AND LOCATION: Plant layout: objectives, principles and
types, factors affecting plant layout, production line flow patterns, Plant location:
6 6
factors affecting the selection of location. Location of factory in small town,
suburban areas, location pattern of Indian industries.
NEW TRENDS IN OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT: Toyota Production
System, Just in Time manufacturing, Kanban, lean manufacturing systems, Total
7 6
quality management, Business process re-engineering, Logistics and supply chain
management.

Sr. Course outcomes: Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Understand the concepts of ‘Production planning & control’ and
L2
aggregate production planning in Industries.
2 Apply the Routing, scheduling and sequencing techniques used in
L3
industries.
3 Apply the concepts of storing and purchasing procedure in various
organizations. L3
4 Choose the Dispatching procedure used in various industries. L5
5 Design and develop the plant layouts using Design heuristics. L6
6 Analyze the concepts new trends in operations management like TPS,
JIT, TQM and SCM. L4
CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 - - - 2 1 1 2
CO2 2 1 1 1 2 - 2 - - - 2 1 1 1
CO3 2 1 1 - 2 - 2 - 1 - 2 1 1 2
CO4 1 1 1 2 1 - 1 - 1 - - 1 1 1
CO5 2 1 1 1 2 1 2 - 1 - - 1 1 1
CO6 1 1 1 - 3 1 1 - - 2 3 1 1 2

Sr. Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Year of

No. Publication/
Reprint
1. Industrial Engineering and Management, Hicks, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi 2003
 2. Production Control, John F. Biegal, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi 1974
3. Modern Production/Operation Management, Buffa and Sarin, John Wiley and sons 2015
4. Industrial Engineering and Production Management, M. Mahajan, Dhanpat Rai and
2016
sons
5. Production & Operations Management, Surya Prakash Singh, Vikas publishing
2018
House Pvt. Ltd., Noida

Course Name : HYDRAULIC MACHINES

Course Code : MEE1023
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-1/2-2/2
Course Objectives:
1 Understand the basic principles of Hydraulic Machines.
2 To review the development of Hydel power plants and its eco-system.
3 Understand the working and design of hydraulic turbines and hydraulic pumps.
4 Basic understanding of various hydraulic systems.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
HYDRO-ELECTRIC DEVELOPMENT: Development of water turbines, Types of
1 water wheels, components of hydropower plant. Types of hydroelectric power plant. 3
Types of turbine losses and efficiencies in hydraulic turbines.
PRINCIPLES OF HYDRAULIC MACHINES: Impulse Momentum equation,
Impact of Jets Force on Stationery Plates, Force on moving plates force on series of
2 4
vanes. Euler Equation for hydraulic machines, Degree of Reaction, Vortex motion and
flow in turbine.
HYDRAULIC IMPULSE TURBINES: Components of Pelton Turbines, Dimension
3 of bucket of Pelton turbine, Number of buckets Diameter of jets, speed ratio jet ratio, 4
no. of jets, Energy conversion in Pelton turbines.
HYDRAULIC REACTION TURBINE: Evolution of Reaction turbines, Francis
Turbine Draft tube, power losses and efficiencies of Francis turbine, Francis turbine
4 proportions outward Vs inward flow reaction turbine. Axial flow turbines. 7
Components of an axial flow turbine blade. Performance at part loads. Adjustment of
Kaplan turbine, Kaplan turbine proportions Application of aerofoil theory.
GOVERNING OF HYDRAULIC TURBINES: Necessity of governing of hydraulic
turbines, Requirements of a good governing system in hydraulic turbines, Essential
5 3
elements of governing system, double regulation of turbines governing of Impulse
turbines, governing mechanism of impulse and reaction turbines
PERFORMANCE OF HYDRAULIC TURBINES: Unit quantities, specific speed,
6 characteristics of turbine, Types of characteristic curve, constant head characteristics, 3
constant speed characteristics and instant efficiency or Muschel curve.
CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS: Classification of centrifugal pumps, components of
centrifugal pump, working of centrifugal pump, Heads of pumps, Energy Conversion
in centrifugal pump, variation of Euler’s head with vane shapes. Effect of finite no. of
7 vanes on Euler’s head, losses and efficiencies, Minimum starting speed, Net positive 7
suction head, Multi stage pumps, Pumps in parallel and series primary devices,
concept of specific speed and performance of centrifugal pump Cavitation in
Hydraulic pumps.
RECIPROCATING PUMP: Components and working of reciprocating pump,
classification of reciprocating pump, Discharge through reciprocating pump, slip,
8 6
Power input, Indicator diagram Effect of piston acceleration head on indicator
diagram, Maximum speed of reciprocating pump, Arrangement of delivery pipe in
 reciprocating pump, air vessels, pressure head in cylinder with Air vessels during
suction and delivery stroke, Maximum speed with air vessels comparison with
centrifugal and Reciprocating pump
HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS AND MACHINES: Hydraulic system, Hydraulic
accumulator, Hydraulic intensifier, Hydraulic Jigger, Hydraulic left Hydraulic Crane,
9 5
Hydraulic Press, Hydraulic coupling Hydraulic Torque converter, Hydraulic pump
Hydraulic Ram, Air lift pump, jet pump.

List of Experiments: No. of Turns

1 To determine the characteristics curve of a Pelton wheel. 1
2 To determine the characteristics curve of a Francis turbine. 2
3 To determine the characteristics curve of a centrifugal pump. 2
4 To obtain the efficiency of a reciprocating pump under various heads. 1
5 To study the hydraulic ram and determine its efficiency. 1

Sr. Course outcomes: Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Recognize the basic fluid machineries and their components. L2
2 Apply the basic principles of hydraulic machines. L3
3 Analyze the performance of hydraulic machines. L4
4 Determinethe performance characteristicscurves of hydraulic machines. L5
5 Investigate and optimize the design parameters of hydraulic systems. L6

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 1 1
CO2 3 2 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - - - 2 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - - 3 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - - 3 2

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
1 Hydraulic Machines by T.R. Banga and S. Sharma, Khanna Publisher 1995
2 Fluid Mechanics & Hydraulic Machines, SS Ratta, Khanna Publisher 2019
3 Theory and Design of Hydraulic Machines, V.P. Vasandani, Khanna Publisher. 1990
4 Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines, R.K. Rajput, S. Chand publisher. 2016

Course Name : DESIGN OF THERMAL SYSTEMS

Course Code : MEE1024/MEM1001
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-1-0

Course Objectives:
To provide the knowledge of various mathematical techniques used in design and optimization of
1
thermal systems.
2 To model and simulate the different thermal engineering problems.
 To give an insight of a commercial software for modelling, simulation and optimization of the
3
thermal systems.

Total No. of Lectures – 42

Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
ENGINEERING DESIGN: Design versus Analysis, Design versus Synthesis, Selection
versus Design, Design as part of Engineering Enterprises, Basic Characteristics of
1 Thermal System, Basic Consideration in Design, Conceptual Design, Basic steps in design 07
process, Computer Aided Design of Thermal System, Material Properties and Selection
for Thermal System.
MODELING OF THERMAL SYSTEM: Introduction, Types of Models, Mathematical
Modeling, Physical Modeling and Dimensional Analysis, Importance of Modeling in
2 07
Design, Basic Features of Modeling, Type of Models, General procedure of mathematical
modeling, physical modeling and dimensional analysis.
NUMERICAL MODELLING AND SIMULATION: Numerical Model, Solution
3 Procedure, Numerical Model of a System, System Simulation, Methods of Numerical 07
Simulation.
ACCEPTABLE DESIGN OF THERMAL SYSTEM: Initial Design, Design Strategies,
Design of System in different application areas such as manufacturing, electronics,
4 07
environment, heat transfer and fluid flow, Additional Considerations in Large Practical
Systems.
PROBLEM FORMULATION FOR OPTIMIZATION: Introduction to Optimization
in Design, Basic Concepts, Optimization methods, Important Considerations for
5 07
Optimization of Thermal System, Different Types of Thermal System, Practical Aspects
of Thermal Design.
THERMAL SYSTEM ANALYSIS AND SIMULATION USING COMMERCIAL
SOFTWARE: Modelling Periodic Flow and Heat Transfer, Laminar Flow Convection,
6 07
Turbulent Forced Convection, Compressible Flow in Nozzle, Modelling Cavitation,
Solidification and Steady and Unsteady Flow Past a Cylinder, Flat Plate Boundary Layer.

Course outcomes: Knowledge Level

Sr. No.
By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 To have knowledge of different aspects of designing of a thermal system. L1, L3
2 To identify and examine a design problem associated to a thermal system. L4
3 To have understand basics of modeling and their associated techniques. L6
To inculcate an ability to solve engineering problems using knowledge of
4 L7
various disciplines.
To inculcate an ability to identify, formulates, and solves engineering
5 L2, L5
problems.
Top inculcate an ability to use the mathematical tools for optimization of
6 L3
engineering problems.
To design, formulate analysis and solve engineering problems using L6
7
mathematical as well as commercial software tools.
To explain economic and exergoeconomic aspects associated with L4
8
designing and optimization of thermal system.
CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 2 1 2 - - - - - - - - 2 1
CO2 2 3 2 1 - - - - - - - - 2 1
CO3 2 2 1 3 2 1 - - - - - - 3 2
CO4 2 3 1 1 3 2 1 - - - - - 3 2
CO5 3 2 2 1 1 2 1 - - - - - 1 3
CO6 2 2 3 2 - - - - - - - - 1 3
CO7 2 2 - 3 - - - - - 1 2 3 1 3
CO8 3 2 2 3 - - - 1 1 1 - - 1 3

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
1 Design and Optimization of Thermal System, Y Jaluria, 2nd ed., CRC Press. 2020
2 Heat Transfer, Cengel and Boles, 2nd ed., McGraw Hill. 2002
Thermal Design and Optimization, A Bejan, G Satsoranis and M Moran, 2nd ed.,
3 1996
Wiley Inderscience.
Computational Fluid Dynamics, Versteeg and Malalasekhera, 1st ed., Longman
4 2007
Scientific & Technical.

Course Name : MEMS AND MICRO SYSTEM DESIGN

Course Code : MEE1025
Credits : 4
LT P : 3-1-0

Course Objectives:
1 To provide knowledge of semiconductors and solid mechanics to fabricate MEMS devices.
2 To educate on the rudiments of micro fabrication techniques.
3 To introduce various sensors and actuators.
4 To introduce different materials used in MEMS.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
INTRODUCTIONTOMEMS: Origin of Micro-electro-mechanical-systems
1 (MEMS), Intrinsic characteristics of MEMS and their applications, scaling laws in 8
miniaturization, Materials for MEMS, the multidisciplinary nature of micro-systems.
2 MICROMACHINING TECHNOLOGIES: Additive techniques, Oxidation &
6
physical vapor deposition, Chemical vapor deposition, and other additive techniques.
MECHANICS AND DESIGN OF MICRO-SYSTEMS: Mechanics, Dynamics,
3 electrostatics, Advanced MEMS operating, Principles for sensing and actuation
8
including Piezo resistive, Piezoelectric, Thermo-mechanical, Magnetic, Micro-fluidics:
Flow, heat and mass transfer at small scales, Electro kinetics.
WORKING PRINCIPLE OF MICROSYSTEMS: Micro-sensors, acoustic wave
sensors, biomedical and nano-sensors, chemical sensors, optical sensors, pressure
4 sensors, thermal sensors, micro-actuation through thermal forces, SMA-Piezo electric 8
crystals, and electrostatic forces, magnetic actuation, Micro devices: Micro-grippers,
Micro-motors, Micro-valves, Micro pumps, Micro-accelerometers.
POLYMER MEMS: Polymers in MEMS, Poymide, SU-8, Liquid Crystal Polymer
5 (LCP), PDMS, PMMA, Parylene, Fluorocarbon, Application to Acceleration, Pressure, 6
Flow and Tactile sensors.
CASE STUDIES OF MEMS PRODUCTS: Micro-fluidic devices, Micro/nano
6 transducers, Blood pressure sensor, Microphone-acceleration sensors, Gyroscope, 6
Magnetic actuation.

Sr. Course outcomes: Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Review the fundamentals of MEMS. L1
 2 Apply the basics of electro-magnetic fabrication techniques in mechanical L3
engineering
3 Analyze the mechanics and design of micro-systems. L4
4 Understand the working principle of MEMS sensors and actuators. L2
5 Choose the basic devices and techniques to be used in polymer MEMS. L5
6 Prepare the case studies on MEMS for different industrial applications. L6
CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 1 2 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO2 1 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO3 2 3 3 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO4 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO5 2 3 2 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 2
CO6 1 1 2 3 - - - - 2 2 - 1 3 1

Suggested Books:
Sr. Year of
No. Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
Reprint
1 Foundation of MEMS, C Liu, Pearson Education. 2017
2 Micro sensors, MEMS and Smart devices, JW Gardner, VK Varadhan, John Wiley &
2001
Sons.
3 Nano structure and Nano materials, synthesis, properties and applications, G Cao,
2011
Ying, World Scientific Publishing Co.
4 MEMS and Micro system Design and Manufacturing, T R Hsu, Tata McGraw Hill. 2017
5 Nano Scale Science and Technology, Robert K, Ian W H, Mark Geoghegan. 2005

Course Name : TRIBOLOGY AND LUBRICATION

Course Code : MEE1026
Credits : 4
LT P : 3-1-0
Course Objectives: This course is aimed to
1 Give exposure to the students about the interaction between the three basic areas of engineering, i.e.,
friction, wear and lubrication.
2 Give exposure to complete range of industrial lubricants and their mechanical behavior.
3 Enable students to design sliding contact and rolling contact bearings.

Total No. of Lectures – 42

Sr. Contents
No.
SURFACE INTERACTION AND FRICTION: Topography of surfaces, Surface features:
properties and measurement, surface interaction, adhesive theory of sliding friction, rolling
1 friction, friction properties of metallic and non-metallic materials, friction in extreme 7
conditions, thermal considerations in sliding contact, concept on geometry for
the performance analysis of bearing.
WEAR AND SURFACE TREATMENT: Types of wears, mechanism of various types of
2 wear, laws of wear, theoretical wear models, wear of metals and non-metals, plastics and
7
ceramics, surface treatments, surface modifications, surface topography measurements, laser
methods, instrumentation, international standards in friction and wear measurements.
 LUBRICANTS AND LUBRICATION REGIMES: Lubricants and their physical
3 properties, viscosity and other properties of oils, additives and selection of lubricants,
7
Lubricants Standards: ISO, SAE, AGMA, BIS standards, lubrication regimes, solid
lubrication, dry and marginally lubricated contacts, boundary lubrication.
SELECTION OF BEARINGS: Selection criteria, dry and boundary lubrication bearings,
hydrostatic and hydrodynamic bearings, electromagnetic bearings, dry bearings, rolling
4 element bearings, bearings for precision applications, foil bearings, special bearings, 6
selection of plain bearing materials, metallic and non-metallic bearings, tolerance on
bearings.
THEORY OF HYDROSTATIC AND HYDRODYNAMIC LUBRICATION: Reynolds
equation, assumptions and limitations, one- and two-dimensional Reynolds equation,
5 Somerfield boundary conditions, pressure wave, flow, load capacity and friction calculations
8
in hydrodynamic bearings, long and short bearings, pad bearings and journal bearings,
squeeze film effects, thermal considerations, hydrostatic bearings & lubrication, design of
foil bearings, air bearings.
HIGH PRESSURE CONTACTS AND ELASTO HYDRODYNAMIC
LUBRICATION: Rolling contacts of elastic solids, contact stresses, Hertzian stress,
spherical and cylindrical contacts, contact fatigue life, oil film effects, Elasto Hydrodynamic
6 Lubrication: Theory of soft and hard elasto hydrodynamic lubrication, Reynolds equation for
elasto hydrodynamic lubrication, film shape within and outside contact zones, film thickness 7
and friction calculation, rolling bearings, stresses and deflections, traction drives, internal
clearance, shaft and housing fit, mounting arrangements, materials for rolling bearings,
manufacturing methods, ceramic bearings, rolling bearing cages bearing seals
selection.

Sr. Course outcomes: Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to (Blooms Level)
1 Recall and understand the basics of friction, wear and lubrication L1, L2
2 Apply and evaluate wear mechanism principles to different kinds of materials. L3, L5
Analyze the mechanical behavior of lubricants while working between rubbing
3 L4
surfaces under load without causing wear.
Selection & design of Journal, Ball and Roller Bearings for different
4 L6
applications.
Recall the various equations of fluid mechanics and conjecture these with
5 L1, L6
hydrodynamic lubrication.

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 2 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO2 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - - 1 3 2
CO3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 2
CO5 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 2

Suggested Books:
Sr. Year of
No. Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
Reprint
1 Friction and Wear of Materials, E. Rabinowicz, John Willey & Sons, UK. 1995
2 Basic Lubrication Theory, A. Cameron, Ellis Herward Ltd., UK. 1981
3 Principles of Tribology, J. Halling, Macmillian. 1984
4 Engineering Tribology, J. A. Williams, Oxford Univ. Press. 1994
5 Fundamentals of Tribology, S. K. Basu, S. N. Sengupta & B. B. Ahuja, Prentice-Hall 2005
of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
6 Engineering Tribology, G. W. Stachowiak & A.W. Batchelor, Butterworth- 2005
Heinemann, UK.
7 Tribology Hand Book, M.J. Neale, Butterworth Heinemann, UK. 2001
8 Tribology and Surface Engineering, Aleksander Lisiecki, MDPI AG 2020
Department Elective Courses IV
Course Name : VEHICLE DYNAMICS
Course Code : MEE1029
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-0-2

Course Objectives:
1 To understand the basic principles used in dynamic analysis of vehicles.
2 To gain the basic knowledge in the field of vehicle vibrations.
To understand the stability of vehicles and their effects related to longitudinal, vertical & lateral
3
dynamics.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
BASICS OF MODELING: Introduction to Vehicle dynamics, Fundamental approach
of Modeling, lumped mass, Euler Angles, Vehicle fixed and Earth fixed coordinate
1 6
systems, motion variables, Newton’s second law, Dynamic axle load, static loads on
level ground, Role of inertia, Road modeling.
TYRE DYNAMICS: Tyre forces and moments, Tyre structure, Size and Load Rating,
Terminology and Axis System, Tractive and cornering property of tyre, Camber Thrust,
Castor, Aligning Moment, Combined Braking and Cornering, Conicity and Ply Steer,
2 6
Performance of tyre on wet surface, Ride property of tyres, Magic formulae tyre model,
Estimation of tyre road friction, Test on Various Road surfaces, Tyre vibration and
chattering.
VEHICLE VIBRATIONS: Measures of Ride quality, predictions of vibrations,
suspension stiffness and damping, road roughness models, response to speed breakers,
3 6
Heave, pitch and roll phenomenon of dynamic motion, quarter, half and full vehicle
model, Seat suspension, relation to human body vibrations.
SUSPENSIONS: Suspension Kinematics, Suspension types, Solid Axles, Independent
Suspensions, Anti-Squat and Anti-Pitch Suspension Geometry, Anti-Dive Suspension
Geometry, Roll Center Analysis, Suspension Dynamics, Multi-body vibration, Body and
4 6
Wheel hop modes, Invariant points, Controllable Suspension Elements: Active, Semi-
Active. Choice of suspension spring rate, Calculation of effective spring rate, Vehicle
suspension in fore and apt directions.
STEERING SYSTEM: Steering Linkages, Steering System Forces and Moments,
Steering System Models, Steering Geometry, Steady Handling (2 DOF steady state
model), Under and Over-steer, Effect of Tyre Camber and Vehicle Roll (3 DOF steady-
5 6
state model), Transient Handling and Directional Stability (2 DOF unsteady model),
Effect of Vehicle Roll on Transient Handling (3 DOF unsteady model), Steady-State and
Transient Handling of Articulated Vehicles.
LONGITUDINAL DYNAMICS: Dynamic wheel loads: Simple vehicle model,
influence of grade, Aerodynamic Forces and Moments, Resistance, Rolling Resistance,
6 Load Distribution for Three-Wheeler and Four-Wheeler, Calculation of Maximum 6
Acceleration, Reaction Forces for Different Drives, Braking and Driving Torque,
Prediction of Vehicle Performance.
LATERAL DYNAMICS: Steady State Handling Characteristics, Steady State
Response to Steering Input, Testing of Handling Characteristics, Transient Response
Characteristics, Direction Control of Vehicles Roll Center, Roll Axis, Vehicle Under
7 6
Side Forces, Stability of Vehicle Running on Slope, Banked Road and During Turn,
Effect of Suspension on Cornering, Latest Trends in Vehicle Dynamic Testing Like Four
Poster, Multi Axis Simulator.
Sr. Course outcomes: Knowledge Level
No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Recall the basic concept of vibrations and automobile. L1
2 Understand the vehicle dynamics and apply the vibration concepts when the L2 & L3
vehicle is in dynamic condition.
3 Analyze the tyre dynamics with respect to force & moments. L4
4 Evaluate the effective steering geometry, vehicle handling and directional L5
control of vehicle.
5 Develop the aerodynamic forces & moments, load distribution in the different L6
vehicles.
6 Ability to model and simulate the vehicle using MATLAB and ANSYS L4
software to analyze the vehicle dynamics.

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO2 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO3 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - - 3 1
CO6 2 2 2 3 3 - - - 2 2 - 1 2 2

List of experiments No. of Turns

The experiment work in this course is intended to be carried out to simulate and study a
quarter, half and full vehicle models, behavior of sprung / un-sprung mass & lumped mass
system and the effect of different conditions on vehicle loading using MATLAB and 14
ANSYS software in the CAD Lab. In addition, study of latest technologies available
nowadays in vehicles helping to maintain stability of the vehicle on the road.

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
Fundamentals of Vehicle Dynamics, Thomas D. Gillespie, Society of Automotive
1 1992
Engineers Inc.
2 Theory of Ground Vehicles, Wong. J. Y., 3rd ed., Wiley-Interscience. 2001
3 Vehicle Dynamics and Control, Rajesh Rajamani, 1st ed., Springer. 2005
4 Vehicle Stability, Dean Karnopp, 1st ed., Marcel Dekker. 2004
5 Vehicle Dynamics: Theory and Application, Nakhaie Jazar. G., 1st ed., Springer. 2008
6 Tyre and Vehicle Dynamics, Hans B Pacejka, 2nd ed., SAE International. 2012
7 Fundamentals of Vehicle Dynamics, Thomas D. Gillespie, SAE International 2021

Course Name : ADVANCED MANUFACTURING TECHNIQUES

Course Code : MEE1030
Credits : 4
LT P : 3-1-0
Course Objectives: To impart the knowledge of
1. Surface modification, PVD, CVD, cladding, diffusion and diamond coating.
2. Rapid prototyping, hybrid and micro machining.
3. Advance mechanical, thermal, chemical and electrochemical non-conventional machining.
5. Advance finishing process and fabrication of microelectronic devices.
Total No. of Lectures – 42

Lecture wise breakup No. of

Lectures
INTRODUCTION: Trends in modern manufacturing, Classification of advanced
manufacturing, Surface modification: Advanced ceramic and organic methods,
1 6
cleaners, Electro forming, physical and chemical vapour deposition, thermal
spraying, ion implantation, diffusion coating, diamond coating and cladding.
NON-TRADITIONAL MACHINING: Mechanical methods: USM, AJM, AWJM
processes: Principle, process parameters, description, mechanics of material removal
rate, effect of parameters on machining responses, capabilities, limitations and
applications; Chemical and electrochemical methods: Fundamental and mechanics
of material removal; CH, ECM, ECG, Electrochemical deburring, Electrochemical
2 honing processes: description, material removal rate, effect of process parameters on 10
performance characteristics, capabilities, limitations and applications; Thermal
methods: EDM, WEDM, LBM, EBM, PAM, PAW processes: Principles, mechanics
of material removal rate, equipment, analysis of circuits, performance
characterization, effect of process parameters on MRR and surface finish,
capabilities, limitations and applications.
HYBRID AND MICRO MACHINING: Hybrid machining: Concept,
Classification. ECSM, TWECDM, LAECSM, VAEDM, EDG, Process description,
performance characterization, parametric effect, capabilities, limitations and
3 applications; Micromachining: Introduction to micro machining, micro-turning, 8
micro-milling, micro-drilling, micro EDM, micro-WEDM, micro-ECM: Process
parameters, MRR, performance characterization, parametric effect, capabilities,
limitations and applications.
RAPID PROTOTYPING: Importance and Types, Principles and advantages,
5 Stereo lithography, FDM, SLS, factors effecting the responses of RP, Accuracy and
5
Economic considerations.
ADVANCE FINISHING PROCESS: AFM, MRF, MRAFF, MFP, EEM, CMP:
6 Process description, mechanics of finishing, performance characterization,
6
parametric effect, capabilities, limitations and applications.
FABRICATION OF MICROELECTRONIC DEVICES: Crystal growth and
wafer preparation, Film Deposition oxidation, lithography, bonding and packaging,
7 reliability and yield, Printed Circuit boards, computer aided design in 7
microelectronics, Integrated circuit and surface mount technology, E-Manufacturing,
nanotechnology and MEMS.

Sr. Course outcomes: Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
Recall previously learnt basic concept of manufacturing and trends in modern
1 L1
Manufacturing.
2 Understand the philosophies of advanced and modern manufacturing. L2
3 Plan and apply the concept of non-traditional and hybrid machining. L3
Analyze the effects of various process parameters on process performance
4 L4
characteristics.
Ability to decide the appropriate manufacturing processes for quality finishing in
5 L5
nano domain.
Adapt e-manufacturing, nanotechnology and MEMS for fabrication of
6 L6
microelectronic devices.
CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 3 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 2 3
CO2 3 2 3 1 2 - - - - - 1 2 3 1
CO3 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - 2 3 3 2
CO4 2 3 1 3 1 - - - - - 1 2 2 1
CO5 2 2 3 3 3 - - - - - 2 1 3 1
CO6 1 1 1 2 3 - - - - - 1 1 2 2

Year of
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
Reprint
1. Manufacturing Engineering and Technology, Kalpakijian, Adisson Wesley 1995
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology, 7th Ed. Serope Kalpakjia, Steven R.
2018
Schmid, Pearson Education.
2. Process and Materials of Manufacturing, R. A. Lindburg, 4th edition, PHI 1990
3. Foundation of MEMS, Chang Liu, Pearson publications. 2012
4. Advanced Machining Processes, V.K.Jain, Allied Publications 2009
5. Introduction to Manufacturing Processes, John A Schey, Mc Graw Hill 2012

Course Name : SURFACE ENGINEERING

Course Code : MEE1031
Credits : 4
L T P : 302

Course Objectives:
1 To impart the knowledge of Surface properties and their impact on performance of components.
To get familiar with the various techniques of surface treatment and characterizations of metallic
2
components.
To acquire the knowledge of various fields of applications for implementing the surface engineering
3
to improve the product performance.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
INTRODUCTION: Importance and necessity of surface engineering; past, present
and future scenario of surface engineering; Properties of Solid Surfaces:
1 Tribological and optical properties; Electric and opto-electronic properties, 5
Importance and objectives of surface properties, Corrosion of solid surfaces, Surface
preparation techniques.
WEAR AND CORROSION: Wear: Classification, Abrasive, Solid particle
erosion, Liquid erosion, Slurry erosion and adhesive wear; Fretting, Rolling-contact
wear, wear measurement; Corrosion: Types and conditions of corrosion,
2 8
Electrochemical, Uniform, Galvanic, Crevice, Inter-granular, Fretting and Erosion
corrosions; Pitting, Cavitation, Exfoliation, Stress-corrosion cracking, Corrosion
fatigue, Hydrogen embrittlement, corrosion measurement.
SURFACE TREATMENT TECHNIQUES: Selective surface hardening, Flame
hardening, Induction hardening, High-energy beam hardening, Laser melting and
3 10
curing, Shot peening, Friction stir processing; Chemical conversion treatment,
Diffusion heat treatment of surfaces, Carburizing, Nitriding, powder bed chemical
 case hardening.
THIN FILM COATING: Organic and inorganic paintings, Ceramic coatings and
linings, Hot dip and electrochemical deposition, Thermal spray and vapour
4 7
deposition, Powder mixed electric discharge alloying and film deposition, Ion
implantation and metal alloying by laser beam.
CHARACTERIZATION OF ENGINEERED SURFACES: Characterization of
surface properties, Thickness of coatings and films, Bond strength of coating,
5 7
Substrate, Micro-hardness, Phase determination using X-Ray Diffraction (XRD)
analysis, Scanning Electron Microscopy (SEM), Metallographic examination.
APPLICATIONS OF SURFACE ENGINEERING: Surface engineering for
6 cutting tools, automotive engine components, Gas turbine engines, Bio-Medical 5
implants and aerospace industry.

Sr. List of Experiments

No. of Turns
No.
1 Wear and corrosion analysis of treated surface. 3
2 Thermal spray deposition of metal powder on surface of cylindrical work-piece. 3
Powder mixed EDM operation for surface alloying and analyzing the characteristics
3 4
of machined surfaces.
A case study and project work on mechanical treatment and surface modification of
4 4
metal components.

Sr. Course outcomes: Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Understand the basic surface properties and their importance towards the L2
performance of components and overall economics.
2 Interpret various types of wear and corrosion phenomenon occurring on L4
different types of materials.
3 Understand the facts and ideas on different types of surface modification and L2
coating techniques used in various fields of engineering.
4 Evaluate the surface texture and quality of surface modified by different L5
applied surface treatment techniques.
5 Apply surface modification techniques to modify the surface properties of L3
metallic components.
6 Design surface modification technique for better quality of surface L6

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO2 3 3 3 1 - - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO3 3 2 3 2 - - 2 - - - - 2 3 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - 1 2 3 2
CO5 2 3 3 2 - - 2 - - - 1 2 3 3
CO6 3 3 3 1 - 1 2 3 2

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
Introduction to Surface Engineering and Functionally Engineered Materials, Peter
1 2011
M. Martin, Wiley & Sons Publishing.
2 Coating Technology Handbook, Arthur A. Traction, 3rd Edition, Taylor & Francis. 2006
 Surface engineering for Corrosion and Wear Resistance, J.R. Davis & Associates,
3 2001
ASM International.
Modern Surface Engineering Treatments, Mahmood metAliofkhazraei,
4 2013
Intechopen.com.
Tribology and Surface Engineering for Industrial Applications, Amit Aherwar,
5 2021
Catalin I. Pruncu, Stanislav Gorb, CRC Press

Course Name : PRODUCT DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT

Course Code : MEE1032
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-1-0

Course Objectives: At the end of the course, the student will be able to:
1 Understand the reverse engineering, redesign methodologies and theories.
2 Identify the significance of analytical and numerical techniques in product development engineering.
3 Understand about the physical models and concepts of product design theory.
Understand the principles in product development taking care with social, environmental and ethical
4
concerns.

Total No. of Lectures –42

Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
INTRODUCTION: Modern Product Development and Design Theories:
1 Understanding the opportunity, Development and Implementation of a concept, 4
Reverse engineering and redesign methodologies.
PRODUCT DESIGN PROCESS: Need, Identification, Kano diagram, Establishing
2 Engineering Characteristics, Quality Function Deployment (QFD), Product Design 8
Specification (PDS), Information Gathering.
CONCEPT GENERATION: Creative methods for design, Functional
3 decomposition and synthesis, Morphological methods, Theory of Inventive Problem 10
solving, Axiomatic Design.
CONCEPT EVALUATION AND DECISION MAKING: Concept evaluation and
4 decision making: Decision Theory, Evaluation methods, Pugh’s concept, weighted 8
decision Matrix.
EMBODIMENT DESIGN: Product Architecture, Configuration and Parametric
5 6
Design Concepts, Ergonomics and Design for Environment and detailed design.
ETHICAL ISSUE AND TEAM MANAGEMENT: Ethical issues considered
6 during Engineering design process, Product liability, Tort law, functioning, 6
discharge, Team Dynamics and problem solving tools in design, Case studies.

Sr. Course outcomes: Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
Understanding the principle and theories of Product Design and
1 L2
Development.
Apply the concept of creative methods for generation and development of
2 L3
product.
Analyze the engineering characteristics and quality function deployment for
3 L4
gathering the information to develop new product.
4 Design the product architecture and configuration of new product. L6
 Develop Ergonomics and consciousness for environmentally sustainable
5 L6
manufacturing and product.
6 Judge and evaluate the methods and decision metrics to develop the product. L5

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO2 3 3 3 1 - - - - - - 1 2 3 2
CO3 3 3 2 2 1 - - - - - - 2 3 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 1 2 3 2
CO5 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - 1 2 3 3
CO6 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 1 3 2

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
1 Engineering Design, George E Dieter, 3rd ed., McGraw Hill 2012
2 Product Design Kevin N. Otto, Kristin L. Wood, Pearson Education 2004
3 Engineering Design, Gahl, W Beitz J Feldhusun, K. G. Grote, 3rd ed., Springer. 2007
4 Introduction to Design Engineering, W. Ernest Eder, S. Hosendl., CRC Press. 2017
Engineering Design and Rapid Prototyping, Ali K. Kamrani and EmadAbouel Nasr,
5 2010
Springer.

Course Name : COMPOSITE MATERIALS

Course Code : MEE1022
Credits : 4
LTP : 3-0-2

Course Objectives: To impart the knowledge about the

1. Matrix, interfaces, fibers, whiskers being used in fabrication of composites.
2. Polymer matrix composites, metal matrix composites, ceramic matrix composites, carbon-carbon
composites and their manufacturing.
3. Testing, properties and applications of different composite materials.
4. Post processing and micromechanics of composites.

Total No. of Lectures – 42

Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
Composite: Definition, characteristics, functions, classification based on structure
and matrix, smart composites, advantages and limitations, industrial scene and
applications, Interfaces: wettability and bonding interface in composites, types of
1
bonding at interface. Fibers: types, natural, glass, boron, carbon, Ex-Pan carbon, 7
Ex cellulose carbon, Ex-Pitch carbon, and aramid fibers, fiber structure, properties,
applications, and recycling; Whiskers: characteristics, properties and applications.
Polymer matrix composites (PMC): Thermoset, thermoplastic and elastomeric
polymers, properties, characteristics and applications as matrix materials,
2 processing of polymer matrix composites: hand methods, Lay up method, spray up
method, moulding methods, pressure bagging and bag moulding methods, 6
pultrusion and filament winding process.
 Metal matrix composites (MMC): Classification of metals, inter-metallic’s, alloys
and their potential role as matrices in composites; properties, characteristics and
3 applications of MMCs, production techniques: powder metallurgy, diffusion
bonding, melt stirring, squeeze casting, liquid infiltration under pressure, spray 6
code position, in-situ process.
Ceramic matrix composites (CMC): Classification of ceramics and their potential
role as matrices; properties, characteristics and applications of CMC; Production
techniques: cold pressing and sintering, hot pressing, reaction bonding, hot pressing
4
and reaction bonding, liquid infiltration, pultrusion, lanxide process, in-situ
7
chemical technique, sol-gel technique, Post processing of CMC: machining,
cutting, polishing, welding, riveting, painting, and plasma coating.
Carbon Carbon Composites (CCC): Classification of carbon and their potential
5 role as matrices; Production techniques of CCC; Properties, characteristics and
4
applications of CCC.
Testing of Composites: Mechanical testing of composites, tensile and compressive
testing, Intra-laminar and Inter-laminar shear testing, Fracture testing; Stiffness and
6 Strength: Geometrical aspects-volume and weight fraction. Effect of unidirectional
5
continuous fiber, discontinuous fibers, short fiber, woven reinforcements on
mechanical properties.
Laminates: Types, Symmetric Laminates, Anti-symmetric Laminate, Balanced
Laminate, Quasi-isotropic Laminates, Cross-ply Laminate, Angle-ply Laminate.
Orthotropic Laminate, Volume and Mass Fractions, Density and Void Content,
7
Laminate Moduli, Approaches and Models of Four Elastic Moduli, Hygrothermal
7
Stresses. Strengths of unidirectional Lamina, Coefficients of thermal, moisture
expansion and Warpage of laminates.

Sr. List of Experiments

No. of Turns
No.
1 Fabrication of Al/SiC-MMC specimen 3
2 Fabrication of PMC by Layup method 3
3 Fabricate and prepare the MMC specimens as per standard size, perform tensile and
4
compressive tests, and analyze the test results
4 A project work on machining and joining of CMC materials 4

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Understand the mechanical behavior of layered composites compared to
L2
isotropic materials.
2 Design and develop the process to fabricate different types of composites
materials. L6
3 Evaluate the mechanical properties and strength of composite materials. L5
4 Select and apply the process to develop composites, and apply constitutive
equations to acquire the knowledge mechanical behavior at micro, macro L3
and meso level.
5 Analyze the mechanical behavior of composites due to variation in
temperature and moisture. L4

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 3 1 1 - - - - - - - 2 3 1
CO2 2 2 3 3 - - - - - - - 2 2 1
CO3 2 3 2 2 - - - - - - - 2 2 1
CO4 2 3 2 2 - - - - - - - 2 2 1
CO5 3 3 1 2 - - - - - - - 2 3 1

Suggested Books:
Sr. Year of
No. Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
Reprint
1 Composite Materials: Science and Engineering, K. K. Chawla, Springer, 3e, 2013
Composite Materials, Engineering and Sciences, F.L.Matthews & R.D.Rawlings,
2 1994
Chapman & hall, London,
3 Hand Book of Composites, George Lubin. Van Nostrand, Reinhold Co. 1982
4 Fiber-reinforced composites, P.K.Mallicak, Monal Deklar Inc., New York, 1988 1988
5 Principles of Composite Mechanics, R.F. Gibson, 2nd Ed., CRC Press. 2007
Introduction to Composite Materials Design 3rd Edition, Ever J. Barbero, CRC
6 2017
Press

Course Name : TWO-PHASE FLOW HEAT TRANSFER

Course Code : MEE1033
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-1-0

Course Objectives:
1 To understand the phenomena occurring at micro and nano scale.
2 To understand the basic mechanisms involved in two phase flow and heat transfer.
3 To understand the concepts of pool boiling and flow boiling heat transfer
4 To introduce the film wise and drop wise mode of condensation.

Total No. of Lectures – 42

Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
LIQUID-VAPOR INTERFACIAL REGION: Molecular Perspective on Liquid-Vapor
Transitions, Molecular Theories of Capillarity, Nano-scale Features of the Interfacial
1 Region, Interfacial Tension Effects: Determination of Interface Shapes, Effect of 6
Temperature and Surfactant Effects, Near Critical Point Behavior and Effects of
Interfacial Tension Gradients.
WETTING PHENOMENA AND CONTACT ANGLES: Equilibrium Contact Angles,
Wettability, Cohesion and Adhesion, Effect of Surface Tension on Contact Angle,
2 5
Adsorption and Spread Thin Films, Contact-Angle Hysteresis, Wettability of Micro-
structured and Nano-structured Surfaces.
HOMOGENEOUS NUCLEATION: Thermodynamic Aspects of Homogeneous
3 Nucleation in Superheated and Super-cooled Liquids, Kinetic Limit of Superheat and 4
Super-saturation, Effect of Wall Interaction.
HETEROGENEOUS NUCLEATION AND BUBBLE GROWTH: Heterogeneous
Nucleation at a Smooth Interface, Nucleation from Entrapped Gas or Vapor in Cavities,
4 Criteria for the Onset of Nucleate Boiling, Bubble Growth in an Extensive Liquid Pool, 5
Bubble Growth Near Heated Surfaces, Bubble Departure Diameter and Frequency of
Bubble Release.
POOL BOILING: Regimes of Pool Boiling, Mechanisms and Models of Transport
during Nucleate Boiling, Correlation of Nucleate Boiling Heat Transfer Data, Limitations
of Nucleate Boiling Processes and the Maximum Heat Flux Transition, Minimum Heat
5 7
Flux Conditions, Film Boiling, Transition Boiling, Leiden frost Phenomenon, Fluid-Wall
Interactions and Disjoining Pressure Effects and Pool Boiling Heat Transfer on Micro and
Nano Structured Surfaces.
 TWO-PHASE FLOW REGIMES: Basic Models and Governing Equations for One-
Dimensional Two-Phase Flows, Determination of the Two-Phase Multiplier and Void
6 7
Fraction, Analytical Models of Annular Flow, Effects of Flow Passage Size and
Geometry.
FLOW BOILING: Regimes of Convective Boiling in Conventional (Macro) Tubes,
Onset of Boiling in Internal Flows, Sub-cooled Flow Boiling, Saturated Flow Boiling,
7 4
Critical Heat Flux Conditions, Post-CHF Internal Flow Boiling, Flow Boiling in Micro-
Channels.
CONDENSATION: Nusselt theory: Importance, Limitations and Modifications, Film
Condensation on a Flat Vertical Surface, Effects of Vapor Motion, Interfacial Waves and
8 4
Non-condensable Gases, Heterogeneous Nucleation in Vapors, Drop wise Condensation:
Surface Requirements, Fundamentals and Recent Advancements.

Sr. Course outcomes: Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Identify the important forces and their characteristics at small scale. L2
2 Apply the basics of two-phase heat transfer processes on simple and complex
systems. L3
3 Examine the performance of two-phase heat transfer systems. L4
4 Select the suitable phase-change heat transfer process and evaluate the
L5
important process parameters for practical applications.
5 Design heat transport systems for boiling and condensation heat transfer. L6
CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 1 1
CO2 3 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - - - 3 2
CO4 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - - 3 2
CO5 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - - 3 3

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
Liquid-Vapor Phase-Change Phenomena: An Introduction to the Thermo physics of
1 Vaporization and Condensation Processes in Heat Transfer Equipment, Van P. Carey, 2020
3rd Edition, CRC Press.
2 Convective Boiling and Condensation, J.G. Collier, Clarendon Press. 1996
Boiling Heat Transfer and Two-phase Flow, L. S. Tong, and Y.S. Tang, 1st ed., 2018
3
Rutledge.
Encyclopedia of Two-phase Heat Transfer and Flow, John R Thome, A 4-volume Set,
4 2018
World Scientific.
Course Name : THERMAL SYSTEM MODELING AND SIMULATION
Course Code : MEE1034/MEM1002
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-1/2-2/2

Course Objectives:
To understand the significance of modelling and simulation of different engineering problems using
1
various techniques.
To understand various mathematical techniques in solution of variety of problems related to design
2
and optimization of Thermal Systems.
To understand the application of software for modelling, simulation and optimization of engineering
3
systems problems.
4 To design and analyze of industrial equipment’s and hydraulic systems.

Total No. of Lectures – 42

Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
INTRODUCTION TO THERMAL DESIGN: Design, Mathematical Modelling
and Numerical Simulation of Thermal Systems, Approach to Robust Design,
1 Numerical Methods for thermal and energy systems, Closed form solutions of heat 07
transfer problems, Finite Difference and Finite Volume Formulations, TDMA
Method
DESIGN AND ANALYSIS OF THERMAL EQUIPMENT: Design Strategies,
Design of Heat Exchanger, Refrigeration System, Solar Thermal System, Heat Pump,
2 07
Cooling of Electronic Components, Energy Storage System and Design
Consideration for Engineering Material Selection.
DESIGN AND ANALYSIS OF HYDRAULIC SYSTEM: Introduction to
Hydraulic Systems, Constituents of Hydraulic System, Directional Control Valve,
3 07
Pressure Control Valve and Flow Control Valve, Hydraulic Circuit Design and
Analysis.
OPTIMIZATION: Basic Concepts, Objective Function, Methods, Optimization of
Mechanical System and case studies, Practical Aspects in Optimal Design,
4 07
Constrained and Unconstrained Problems: Langrage Multiplier, Geometric &
Dynamic Programming based optimization.
THERMAL SYSTEM SIMULATION: Simulation of Periodic Heat Transfer,
5 Laminar and Turbulent Convection, Compressible Flow in Nozzle, Cavitation and 07
Solidification, Flow Past a Cylinder, Flat Plate Boundary Layer.
ECONOMIC AND EXERGO-ECONOMIC ANALYSIS: Estimation of Total
Capital Investment, Principal of Economic Evaluation, Calculation of Revenue
6 Requirements, Levelized Cost Rates, Cost Rate of Exergy Destruction, Exergy 07
Destruction, Percentage Relative Cost Difference, Total Operating Cost Rate and
Exergo-economic Factor.

Experiments: No. of
Turns
Thermal system modelling and simulation experiments on Heat Exchanger, refrigeration
07
system, hydraulic system, solar energy, energy storage etc. will be performed using ANSYS
Fluent /CFX, COMSOL etc.

Sr. Course outcomes: Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 To have knowledge of different aspects of designing of a thermal system. L1, L3
2 To identify and examine a design problem associated to a thermal system. L4
 3 To integrate thermal component models and simulate a thermal system. L6
To design, formulate analysis and solve engineering problems using
4 L7
knowledge of various disciplines.
To inculcate an ability to identify, formulates, and solves engineering
5 L2, L5
problems using mathematical techniques.
To perform technoeconomic analysis of thermal system using commercial
6 L3
software techniques.
7 To communicate thermal system designs both orally and in writing. L6
To understand some of the ethical and societal issues associated with
8 L4
design and optimization of thermal system.

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 2 1 2 - - - - - - - - 2 1
CO2 2 3 2 1 - - - - - - - - 2 1
CO3 2 2 1 3 2 1 - - - - - - 3 2
CO4 2 3 1 1 3 2 1 - - - - - 3 2
CO5 3 2 2 1 1 2 1 - - - - - 1 3
CO6 2 2 3 2 - - - - - - - - 1 3
CO7 2 2 - 3 - - - - - 1 2 3 1 3
CO8 3 2 2 3 - - - 1 1 1 - - 1 3

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
Design and Optimization of Thermal System with MATLAB Applications, Y
1 2020
Jaluria, 3rd ed., CRC Press.
2 Heat Transfer, Cengel and Boles, 2nd ed., McGraw Hill. 2002
Thermal Design and Optimization, A Bejan, G. Satsoranis and M Moran, 2nd ed.,
3 1996
Wiley Inder science.
Computational Fluid Dynamics, Versteeg and Malalasekhera, 1sted., Longman
4 2007
Scientific & Technical.

Course Name : NON-CONVENTIONAL ENERGY RESOURCES

Course Code : MEE1035
Credits : 4
LT P : 3-1-0

Course Objectives: To understand the

1 Solar energy, wind energy and biomass energy technologies.
2 Basic concepts of solar radiation, solar thermal systems and PV cells.
3 Wind-energy potential and get familiarize with different systems for its effective utilization.
4 Bio-energy generation from the bio-waste and waste management system.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
INTRODUCTION: Introduction to sustainable energy, energy and environment,
energy scenario and role of renewable in India, human development index, conventional
4
1 energy sources, limited fossil fuels, environmental impact of fossil fuels,
energy alternatives, introduction to various sources of renewable energy.
SOLAR RADIATION AND ITS MEASUREMENT: Extra-terrestrial radiation,
spectral distribution, solar constant, solar radiations on earth, measurement of solar 4
2
radiations, solar radiation geometry, solar radiation on tilted surface.
SOLAR ENERGY: Solar flat plate collector, solar air heater, solar water heater, types
of concentrating collectors, solar energy tracking systems, introduction to solar thermal
6
3 energy storage systems, solar energy plants in India, Solar energy mission,
environmental impact of solar energy, Solar photovoltaic systems and applications.
WIND ENERGY: Introduction, Wind resource assessment, wind data and energy
estimation, energy pattern factor in wind power, Weibull probability density function,
Beaufort wind scale, Wind power generation curve, Fundamentals and classification of
wind turbines, aerodynamic design principles, Modern wind turbines and their 12
4 characteristics, power extraction and control strategies, Modes of wind power
generation, Wind energy farms, Wind energy power plants in India, Futuristic hybrid
wind-solar system, Economic consideration and environmental impact.
BIO-ENERGY: Introduction, Photosynthesis, Constituents of biomass materials,
Analysis of biomass: Biochemical, Proximate analysis, Ultimate analysis, Primary
biomass as source of energy: Woody biomass, oilseed crops, energy plantation,
Secondary biomass as source of energy: Residues and wastes, Processes of biomass
separation and pelleting, Thermochemical Processing: Combustion, pyrolysis,
5 12
gasification, hydrothermal processing, transesterification, producer gas, bio-diesel,
Biochemical Processing: Anaerobic digestion, fermentation to produce ethanol,
enzymatic conversion, Bio-power generation systems: Energy from urban waste, liquid
waste, Power generation from landfill gas, biomass cogeneration, biomass resource
development in India, environmental impact and future of bio-energy.
WASTE CYCLE MANAGEMENT: Introduction, Common source of waste,
Different types of waste, Waste management, Recycling processes and waste 4
6
management, Advantages and disadvantages of recycling waste and Recycling plants.

Sr. Course outcomes: Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
Introduction to energy and environment, energy scenario in India and role of
1 L2
renewable energy.
Demonstrate various renewable energy systems based on solar, wind and bio-
2 L3
energy, and discuss their present status and future plans in India.
Estimate the solar radiation, formulate heat transfer equations, and analyze
3 L4 L5
modern energy conversion systems used in solar applications.
Examine the wind energy potential and evaluate the performance of wind L4
4
energy plants. L5
Examine different methods of bio-energy sources, bio-energy harvesting,
5 waste cycle management, and evaluate their economic and operational L4 L5
viability.
 CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 1 1 1 - - 1 - - - - 1 1 -
CO2 2 2 1 1 - - 1 - - - - 1 2 -
CO3 3 3 2 2 - - 1 - - - - 1 3 1
CO4 3 3 3 2 - - 1 - - - - 1 3 1
CO5 3 3 3 2 - - 2 - - - - 2 3 1

Suggested Books:
Sr. Year of
No. Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
Reprint
1 Non-Conventional Energy Sources, G.D. Rai, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi 2014
2 Renewable Energy Resources, Twidell, J.W. & Weir, A., EFN Spon Ltd., UK 2005
3 Renewable Energy: Power for a Sustainable Future, Godfrey Boyle, Oxford University
2012
Press, U.K.
4 Solar Energy: Principles of Thermal Collection and Storage, S.P. Sukhatme, Tata
2009
McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi.
5 Solar Energy – Fundamentals Design, Modelling and applications, G.N. Tiwari,
2015
Alpha, Science Intl Ltd.
6 Non-Conventional Energy Resources, B.H. Khan, McGraw Hill 2017
7 Wind Energy Explained-Theory, Design and Applications, J. F. Manwell, J. G.
2010
McGowan, and A. L. Rogers, 2nd ed. Wiley
8 Renewable Energy Resources, J. Twidell and T. Weir, 3rd ed. Routledge 2015
9 Principles of Sustainable Energy Systems, F. Kreith, 2nd ed. CRC Press 2014

Course Name : EXPERIMENTAL METHODS FOR ENGINEERS

Course Code : MEE1036
Credits : 4
LT P : 3-1-0

Course Objectives:
1 To understand the measurement terminologies and the concept of measurement system.
2 To find the errors and uncertainty in the measurements.
3 To understand different sensors used for measurement.
4 To identify correct DAQ system for recording and analyzing the experimental results.

Total No. of Lectures – 42

Lecture wise breakup No of
Lectures
INTRODUCTION TO EXPERIMENTAL METHODS: Measurement, Instrument,
Measurement methods, Generalized measurement system and its functional elements,
Classification of instruments, Basic concepts: accuracy, precision, Range, Resolution, 5
1 Span, Experiment planning, Analysis of experimental data: Error Analysis, Evaluation
of and propagation of uncertainties; Regression analysis, Calibration of instruments.
INSTRUMENTCHARACTERISTICS: Introduction,Statictermsand characteristics,
Dynamic terms and characteristics, Standard test-inputs, Zero, first and 4
2
second order instruments, Response of first and second order system.
 FLOW MEASUREMENT AND VISUALIZATION: Positive-displacement
methods, Flow-obstruction methods, Sonic nozzle, Flow measurement by drag effects,
Pressure probes, Hot-wire and hot-film anemometers, Magnetic flow meters, Flow 10
3 visualization methods: Smoke methods, Shadowgraph, Schlieren photography, Laser
Doppler anemometer, Laser-induced fluorescence, Particle image velocimetry.
TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT: Temperature scales, Ideal-gas thermometer,
Temperature measurement by mechanical and electrical effects, Temperature
measurement by radiation, Transient response of thermal systems, Thermocouple 10
4 compensation, Temperature measuring problems in flowing fluids, Dynamic
compensation, Field temperature measurement using infrared camera.
TRANSPORT-PROPERTY MEASUREMENT: Measurement of thermal
conductivity, Measurement of viscosity, Gas diffusion calorimetry, Convection heat
transfer measurement, Humidity measurement, PH measurement, Thermal-radiation
8
measurements: Emissivity measurement, Reflectivity and transmissivity measurement,
5
Air pollution sampling and measurement, Gas sampling techniques, Combustion
products measurement.
DAQ AND SIGNAL ANALYSIS: Systems for data acquisition and processing,
Modules and computerized data system, Selection criteria for choosing a DAQ system,
Digitization rate, Time and frequency domain representation of signals, Nyquist 5
6 criterion, Techniques for signal analysis, Signal conditioners: Filters, low, high, band
pass and amplifiers.

Sr. Course outcomes: Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Discuss different measurement systems and signal recording procedures. L2
2 Interpret the error and minimize the uncertainty in the experimental data. L3
Employ different measurement devices in real-time system to correctly
3 L4
measure the parameters of interest.
4 Select the suitable DAQ system for recording of the experimental data. L5
Design and implement the experimental measurement methodology to
5 L6
existing and new thermo-mechanical systems.

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 1 1
CO2 3 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO3 3 2 3 2 1 - - - 1 - - 2 3 2
CO4 3 2 3 3 2 - - - 2 - - 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 - - - 3 - - 2 3 3

Suggested Books:
Sr. Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Year of
No. Publication/
Reprint
1 Experimental Methods for Engineers (SIE), J. P. Holman, 7th ed., McGraw-Hill. 2017
2 Theory and Design for Mechanical Measurements, R. S. Figliola and D. Beasley, 7th
2020
ed., John Wiley & Sons.
3 Measurement Systems, E. O. Doebelin, 7th ed., McGraw-Hill. 2019
4 An Introduction to Error Analysis, J. R. Taylor, 2nd ed., University Science Books. 1997
5 Theory and Design for Mechanical Measurements, Alex. C. Beasley, Intelliz Press. 2017
Course Name : MICRO-NANO SCALE HEAT TRANSFER
Course Code : MEE1037
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-1-0

Course Objectives:
1 To understand the basic concept of micro/nano scale heat transfer and micro/nano-fluids.
2 To understand the conduction, convection and radiation heat transfer at micro/nano scale.
3 To study the thermal energy storage and transport system.
4 To know the basics of micro-fluidics based devices for micro-flow and biological systems.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
INTRODUCTION: Micro-Nano Scale Phenomena, Basics of Micro/Nano Scale
Heat Transfer and Fluid Mechanics, Miniaturization, Difference between Micro and
1 Macro Scale Heat Transfer Phenomena, Impact of Micro-Nano Technology, 7
Statistical Thermodynamics, Quantum Mechanics, Thermal Properties of Molecules
and Kinetic Theory.
THERMAL TRANSPORT IN SOLID MICRO-NANO STRUCTURES: Electron
and Phonon Scattering, Size Effects, Quantum Conductance, Electronic Band Theory,
2 7
Tunneling, Non-equilibrium Heat Conduction and Analysis of Solid-State Devices
like Thermoelectric Refrigeration and Optoelectronics.
HEAT TRANSFER AT MICRO-NANO SCALE: Fundamentals and Engineering
Applications, Methods and Observations of Thermo-Physical Phenomena in Size-
Affected Domains, Principal Concepts and Practical Design Engineering, Modern
Engineering Applications: Micro-channel Heat Sinks, Micro Heat Exchangers and
3 10
Micro Heat Pipes. Fundamentals of Nano Scale Thermal Phenomena in Fluids: Nano
Scale Thermal Phenomena, Nano-scale Thermal Radiation and Radiative Properties
of Nano-materials, Surface Electromagnetic Waves, Problems on Micro-scale
Conduction, Convection and Radiation Heat Transfer and Modeling.
THERMAL ENERGY STORAGE AND TRANSPORT: Storage by Conduction in
Natural and Engineered Structures, Thermal Energy in Two Carriers, I.E. Phonons
and Electrons, Solid-State Transport, Quantum of Thermal Conductance, Ballistic
4 7
Interface Resistance and Carrier Scattering, Bulk Material Properties: Thermal and
Electrical Conductivity Derived from Particle Transport Theories, Effects of Spatial
Confinement on Bulk Properties.
MICRO-FLUIDICS: Introduction, Important forces and scaling analysis, Governing
equations, Fluids flowing in miniaturized systems, Applications: Fluid control
5 5
devices, gas and fluid measurement devices, medical testing equipments and
implantable drug pumps.
NANO-FLUIDICS: Introduction, Fundamentals of Nano-fluidics, Nano-fluidic
Energy Absorption: Converting Mechanical Energy to Thermal Energy, Nano-fluidic
6 Energy Tapping: Temporarily Storing Mechanical Energy, Nano-fluidic Actuation: 6
Converting Thermal/Electrical Energy to Mechanical Energy, Nano-fluidic Energy
Harvesting: Converting Thermal/Mechanical Energy to Electrical Energy.

Sr. Course outcomes: Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
Understand the difference among the heat transports phenomena at macro,
1 L2
micro, and nano-scale.
Apply the concepts of the thermal energy storage and transport at micro- nano
2 L3
scale systems.
Analyze the heat transfer processes occurring by means of conduction,
3 L4
convection and radiation at small scale.
 Examine heat storage and heat transfer in solids at micro-nano structure levels,
4 L5
and transport behaviour in micro-nano fluidic applications.
Evaluate the performance of micro-fluidic and nano-fluidic system, and develop
5 L5 & L6
new system.
CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 1 1
CO2 2 2 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1
CO3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - - - 2 2
CO4 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - - 3 2
CO5 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - - 3 3

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
Micro-scale and nano-scale heat transfer - Fundamentals and engineering
1 2008
applications, C.B. Sobhan, G.P. Peterson, CRC press.
Micro-scale heat transfer - Fundamentals and applications in biological and micro-
2 electro-mechanical systems, Editors: S. Kakaç, L.L. Vasiliev, Y. Bayazitoğlu, Y. 2004
Yener, Springer.
3 Nano/Micro-scale Heat Transfer, Zhuomin Zhang, McGraw-Hill 2007
Thermal Energy at the Nano-scale - Lessons from Nano science, A Lecture Notes
4 2013
Series, Timothy S Fisher.
Micro fluidics and Nano fluidics - Theory and Selected Applications, Clement
5 2013
Kleinstreuer, Wiley.
6 Introduction to Micro-fluidics, Patrick Tabeling, Oxford University Press 2010
7 Introduction to Bio-MEMS, Albert Folch, CRC press 2019
Department Elective Courses-V
Course Name : PRINCIPLES OF PRODUCT DESIGN
Course Code : MEE1038
Credits : 4
LT P : 3-1-0

Course Objectives: In this course, the student will be able to

1 Learn the technologies and practical applications in the product design and development.
2 Learn how to manage a product over whole product lifecycle.
3 Understand the components and their functions in product design and development processes.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
1 OVERVIEW OF THE DESIGN PROCESS: Philosophy of Engineering Design,
3
Steps involved in the Design Process, S-curves, Challenges of Product Development.
PROBLEM DEFINITION: Identifying Customer needs and requirements,
2 Establishing Engineering Characteristics, Quality Function Deployment (QFD), Product 6
Design Specification.
FUNCTIONAL DESIGN: Functions in engineering Design, Basics of Function
3 Structure,Functional analysisanditssteps, Functional Basis, Functional 7
decomposition and flow.
4 PRODUCT CONCEPT: Methods of concept generation, Theory of resolution of
8
invention-related tasks (TRIZ), Concept selection and methods of evaluation.
EMBODIMENT DESIGN: Product architecture, configuration, parametric design,
5 systems approach and other consideration, Introduction to product metrics, Product 8
evaluation techniques.
INDUSTRIAL DESIGN: Aesthetics and ergonomic aspects of product design,
6 Concepts of Value Engineering, Evaluation of function, cost, worth and value, Failure 6
mode and effects analysis.
7 LEGAL AND ETHICAL ISSUES IN INDUSTRY: Origin of laws, Contracts,
4
Product Liability, Tort Law, Codes of Ethics and solving ethical conflicts.

Sr. Course outcomes: Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Understand and analyze the product design and development processes. L2 & L4
2 Apply and evaluate the methodologies for product design, development and L3 & L5
management.
3 Differentiate between embodiment and industrial design. L4
4 Create and plan a methodical approach to the management of product L6
development to satisfy customer needs.
5 Interpret the legal and ethical issue in product development. L4
CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 1 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 2
CO2 1 2 3 1 - - 1 - - - - 1 2 1
CO3 1 2 3 2 - - - - - - - - 3 1
CO4 1 3 3 3 - - 1 - - - 2 1 3 1
CO5 - - - - - 2 - 3 - - - 2 1 2
Suggested Books:
Sr. Year of
No. Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
Reprint
1 Engineering Design, George E Dieter, 3rd ed., McGraw Hill. 2001
2 Engineering Design, Pahl, W Beitz J Feldhusun, K G Grote, 3rd ed., Springer. 2007
3 Product Design and Development, Karl T. Ulrich, Steven D. Eppinger, Tata McGraw 2007
Hill.
4 The Mechanical Design Process, David G. Ullman, McGraw Hill. 2017

Course Name : INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING AND MANAGEMENT

Course Code : MEE1039
Credits : 4
LT P : 3-1-0

Course Objectives: In this course, the student should be able to understand the
Concept and significance of Industrial engineering & Management and focus on financial
1.
management.
2. Plant location & layout and applications of inventory control systems.
3. Applications of Time & Motion study and Value Engineering.
4. Marketing and Strategic Management.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
lectures
INTRODUCTION: Concept, nature and significance of Industrial Management,
economic, social, political forces affecting business operations & growth. Social 4
1
responsibility of business.
FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT: Scope and functions of financial management, sources
of finance, Balance sheets and financial ratios, Capital Budgeting Decisions, Nature of
investment decisions, Cost of capital and its measurement, Capital Budgeting process,
technique of capital budgeting, Investment criteria: payback period, Accounting rate of 6
2 return method, Discount cash flow method, Net present value method and internal rate of
return method, Management of working capital, factors affecting requirement of working
capital, capital structure decisions.
PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT: Plant location, Weber’s Theory of location of
industries, Layout and assembly line balancing- process and product layout, Government
6
3 policies on industrial location, Production control charts, Route & process charts,
Operation charts, Machine load charts, Process charts, Mechanical and Bar charts.
MATERIALS AND STORE CONTROL: Introduction, significance and scope. Materials
requirement planning, Inventory control- deterministic and probabilistic models, ABC
6
4 analysis, EOQ model, LIFO and FIFO in inventory system, Types of purchasing,
Centralized and De-centralized purchasing.
TIME AND MOTION STUDY: Time and motion study, Job design, job standards, work
measurement time study, work sampling, job evaluation, merit rating, method studies, pre- 7
5
determined motion time standards (PMTS).
VALUE ENGINEERING: Introduction, applications and types of values, concepts of
6 5
value engineering, phases of value engineering studies, value analysis.
MARKETING MANAGEMENT: Nature, scope & importance of Marketing
management, Modern marketing concepts, Consumer vs Industrial marketing, marketing
4
7 mix meaning, nature and scope of international marketing, rural marketing, advertising,
sales and distribution management, channel management.
 STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT AND NEW TRENDS: Strategic management, industry
8 4
matrix plus EFAS, IFAS and SFAS tables. DMAIC – Six Sigma.

Sr. Course outcomes: Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
Understand and illustrate the plant location & layouts concepts of the
1 L2
manufacturing plant
Apply the concepts of Industrial and Financial Management in
2 L3
industries.
3 Analyze the process involved in various inventory models in industries. L4
Explain and evaluate the Time and motion study concepts in the design
4 L5
the workplace layout design.
5 Apply the concepts of Value engineering and Value analysis. L3
6 Analyze the principles of Marketing & Strategic management. L4

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 1 1 - 1 1 1 1 - - - 1 - 1 1
CO2 2 1 1 1 3 - 2 - - - 1 - 1 1
CO3 2 1 1 - 2 - 2 - 1 - 1 - 1 2
CO4 2 1 1 2 2 - 2 - 1 - - - 1 1
CO5 2 1 1 1 2 1 2 - 1 - - - 1 1
CO6 1 2 1 - 3 - 1 - - 1 3 - 1 2

Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Year of Publication/

Reprint
1. Industrial Engineering and Management, Hicks, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi 2003
2. Industrial Management, W.R. Spreigel, 4th ed., John Wiley & Sons: NY 1947
3. Financial Management, Pandey, Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi 2016
Estimating and Costing for Metal Manufacturing Industries, Creese, Adihan 1992
4.
and Pabla, Marcel Dekker Inc., New York
5. Motion and Time Study, R. Barnes, John Wiley & Sons. 2017

Course Name : RELIABILITY AND MAINTENANCE ENGINEERING

Course Code : MEE1040
Credits : 4
LTP : 3-1-0

Course Objectives: To impart the knowledge

1. On the role and contribution of maintenance towards achieving competitive advantage in the
industries.
2. About the key concepts and issues of maintenance in both manufacturing and service organization.
3. About the various strategies, philosophy, scheme and schedules of maintenance engineering and its
applications in the industry.
4. About the safety, housekeeping, breakdown, availability and reliability indices of engineering system.
Total No. of Lectures – 42
Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
INTRODUCTION: Concept, classification and types of maintenance, preventive,
corrective, renovative, planned, breakdown and quality maintenance; objectives and
characteristics of maintenance function, organizational set-up and record keeping,
1 Organizational hierarchy, position and responsibilities of maintenance department, 6
control and coordination in maintenance, benefits and effects of maintenance.
MAINTENANCE PLANNING AND SPARE PARTS MANAGEMENT: Long and
short term planning and scheduling; man power planning, training and allocation,
requirement planning of raw materials and spare parts, inventory control of spare parts,
2 ABC analysis, FSN Approach, XYZ approach, VED approach, Estimation of 5
maintenance work and monitoring.
HOUSEKEEPINGAND SAFETY INMAINTENANCE:Factors governing
housekeeping, illumination, layout and equipment, air distribution, pollution and
ventilation, training and awareness in housekeeping; Safety: Classification and types of
3 hazards, important factors and measurement of hazards, minimize hazards and control of 5
accidents, fault tree analysis, safety devices and cheek list.
RELIABILITY AND AVAILABILITY OF ENGINEERING SYSTEMS: Reliability
and maintainability, failure, Bathtub hazard rate concept; Reliability structures: series,
parallel, combination of series and parallel, redundancy; Quantitative estimation of
4 reliability of parts, mean time to failure (MTTF), mean time between failure (MTBF),
mean time to repair (MTTR), accuracy and confidence of reliability estimation, statistical 6
estimation of reliability indices, machine failure pattern: breakdown time distribution,
machine failure patter.
MAINTENANCE OF DRIVES AND EQUIPMENTS: Mechanical drives and
equipment’s: belts, chains, gears, couplings, brakes and their drives; pumps, compressors,
blowers, air-conditioners; Electrical circuits and equipment’s: power cable, line and
circuit connection, switchboard, fuse, relays, interlocks, contactors, measuring
5
equipment’s, motors, generators; essential care and maintenance; Lubrication: manual, 5
forced and oil bath lubrication, testing, additives used, rectification and re-use of lubricants;
Corrosion: factors influencing and effect of pH value on corrosion, testing,
prevention, application of inhibitors and control techniques
INSPECTION, TESTING, QUALITY CONTROL AND AUDIT IN
MAINTENANCE: Inspection: objectives, interval, card history and report; Testing: non-
destructive, destructive and semi-destructive testing; liquid penetration test, magnetic
6 particle test, ultrasound test, vibration analysis, oil analysis, eddy current testing; Quality
Control: importance, application of statistical quality control tools and techniques; 5
Performance and audit: Maintenance performance indices-BPI, EQBI, MEI, BAI, MUI,
EURRI, BEI; function and operational audit, plan and programme audit.
FAULT DIAGNOSIS AND CONDITION MONITORING: Objectives, methods and
purpose of faults diagnosis and condition monitoring, non-vibration and vibration-based
7 monitoring; periodic and continuous monitoring methods and equipment’s used; fault
diagnosis and condition monitoring of bearings; computerized trouble shooting and 5
condition Monitoring;
BUDGET AND COST ESTINATION OF MAIANTENANCE: Cost estimation: life
cycle cost, machine breakdown cost, repair cost; spare parts and labour cost; impact of
8 maintenance cost, Incentive Payment: objectives, financial, non-financial and semi
financial incentive of maintenance staff, different types of incentive plans for maintenance 5
staff; Budget: objectives and functions of budget in maintenance.
Sr. Course outcomes: Knowledge Level
No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
Understand the philosophies of maintenance of plant, machineries and
1 L2
equipment’s.
Plan and apply the concept of maintenance on repair and renovation of
2 L3
machine, plant and equipment’s.
Analyse the hazards, fault and control of failure using theories, housekeeping
3 L4
and safety in maintenance.
Ability to conduct inspection and tests on machines and equipment’s to
4 L4
assess their condition and availability.
Estimation of reliability of part, system, machine and equipment using
5 L5
different theories of maintenance.
6 Adapt computerized trouble shooting in maintenance. L6

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 2 2 2 - 2 - - - - - 2 3 1
CO2 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - - 2 3 1
CO3 3 2 2 2 1 2 3 3 - - - 3 3 1
CO4 2 3 2 3 1 2 - - - - - 2 3 1
CO5 2 3 3 2 - 1 - - - - - 1 3 1
CO6 1 1 1 3 2 1 - - - - - 1 2 2

Suggested Books:
Sr. Year of
No. Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/Reprint
A text Book of Reliability and Maintenance Engineering, Alakesh Manna, I. K.
1 2020
International Publishing House Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi.
2 Preventive Maintenance, Terry Weriman, Reston Publishing Company. 1984
3 Principle of planned maintenance, Clifton R. H, McGraw Hill. 1983
4 Maintenance Planning and Control, Enthory Kelly, EWP, New Delhi. 1984
5 Maintenance Planning and Scheduling Handbook, 4th Edition, Richard D. 2019
Palmer, Mc Graw Hill

Course Name : OPERATION RESEARCH AND SIMULATION TECHNIQUES

Course Code : MEE1041
Credits : 4
LTP : 3-1-0

Course Objectives: To impart the knowledge of

1.Optimization using calculus and dynamic programming.
2.Linear programming, transportation and assignment problems.
Evolutionary algorithms for optimization and search, Taguchi, Grey-relational analysis, Response surface
methodology, Genetic algorithm-based optimization and simulations.

Total No. ofLectures – 42

Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
 INTRODUCTION AND BASIC CONCEPTS: Historical Development, Art of
Modeling and simulation, Objective function, Formulation of design problems as
1 mathematical programming problems, Classical and advanced techniques, Basics of 5
operations research, OR models and applications.
OPTIMIZATION USING CALCULUS: Stationary points, Functions of single and two
variables, Global Optimum, Convexity and concavity of functions of one and two
variables, Optimization of function of one variable and multiple variables, Gradient
2 vectors, Lagrangian function, Hessian matrix formulation, Eigen values, Kuhn-Tucker 8
Conditions, Optimization problems.
LINEAR PROGRAMMING: Standard and Canonical form of linear programming,
Assumptions in LP Models, Elementary operations, problem formulation, Graphical
method, Simplex method, Big-M method, Two-phase method, Revised simplex method,
Duality in LP, Dual Simplex method, Sensitivity or post optimality analysis, Other
3 8
algorithms for solving LP problems, Karmarkar’s projective scaling method, Use of
software for solving linear optimization problems.
TRANSPORTATION AND ASSIGNMENT PROBLEMS: North west corner rule,
Least cost method, Vogel’s method, Stepping stone method, MODI method, Assignment
problem formulation: Optimal solution, Hungarian algorithm, Variants of assignment 7
4
problems, Travelling salesman problem.
DYNAMIC PROGRAMMING: Representation of multistage decision process, Types of
multistage decision problems, Concept of sub-optimization and optimality, Recursive
equations, Forward and backward recursions, Computational procedure in dynamic
programming, Discrete versus continuous dynamic programming, Multiple state variables,
5
curse of dimensionality, Problem formulation and application of dynamic programming in 7
design of continuous beam and optimal geometric layout of a truss, water allocation as a
sequential process, Capacity expansion and Reservoir operation.
ADVANCED TECHNIQUES IN OPTIMIZATION & SIMULATION: Concept and
object of simulation, Multi objective optimization, Direct and indirect search methods,
Taguchi, Grey-relational analysis, Response surface methodology, Genetic algorithm-
6
based optimization, applications in engineering problems, Algorithms and software for 7
simulations.

Sr. Course outcomes: Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 Understanding the basic concept of optimization, modelling and simulation. L2
Apply scientific methods and mathematical techniques to solve various
2 L3
engineering problems.
3 Analysis of the various optimization techniques for engineering problems. L4
Recommend the various software tools for modelling and simulations of real-
4 L5
time industrial problems.
Development and formulation of new models for better decision making in
5 L6
the organization.

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PSO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1
2
CO1 2 3 3 1 2 - - - - 1 2 1 2 1
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 - 2 - - - 1 1 3 1
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 3 1 3 2
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 - 1 - - 1 2 2 2 2
CO5 3 3 3 1 2 - 1 - 3 2 3 2 3 3
Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
Engineering Optimization: Theory and Practice, S.S. Rao, New Age International Pvt.
1 2019
Ltd., New Delhi.
2 Linear programming, G. Hadley, Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi. 1990
3 Operations Research: An Introduction, H.A. Taha, 5th ed., Macmillan, New York. 1992
Optimization for Engineering Design Algorithms and Examples, K. Deb, Prentice-Hall
4 1993
of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
Multi-criterion Analysis in Engineering and Management, K. Srinivasa Raju, D.
5 2010
Nagesh Kumar, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
MINOR SPECIALIZATION
Course Name : DESIGN OF THERMAL SYSTEMS
Course Code : MEM1001/MEE1024
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-1-0

Course Objectives:
To provide the knowledge of various mathematical techniques used in design and optimization of
1
thermal systems.
2 To model and simulate the different thermal engineering problems.
To give an insight of a commercial software for modelling, simulation and optimization of the
3
thermal systems.

Total No. of Lectures – 42

Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
ENGINEERING DESIGN: Design versus Analysis, Design versus Synthesis, Selection
versus Design, Design as part of Engineering Enterprises, Basic Characteristics of
1 Thermal System, Basic Consideration in Design, Conceptual Design, Basic steps in design 07
process, Computer Aided Design of Thermal System, Material Properties and Selection
for Thermal System.
MODELING OF THERMAL SYSTEM: Introduction, Types of Models, Mathematical
Modeling, Physical Modeling and Dimensional Analysis, Importance of Modeling in
2 07
Design, Basic Features of Modeling, Type of Models, General procedure of mathematical
modeling, physical modeling and dimensional analysis.
NUMERICAL MODELLING AND SIMULATION: Numerical Model, Solution
3 Procedure, Numerical Model of a System, System Simulation, Methods of Numerical 07
Simulation.
ACCEPTABLE DESIGN OF THERMAL SYSTEM: Initial Design, Design Strategies,
Design of System in different application areas such as manufacturing, electronics,
4 07
environment, heat transfer and fluid flow, Additional Considerations in Large Practical
Systems.
PROBLEM FORMULATION FOR OPTIMIZATION: Introduction to Optimization
in Design, Basic Concepts, Optimization methods, Important Considerations for
5 07
Optimization of Thermal System, Different Types of Thermal System, Practical Aspects
of Thermal Design.
THERMAL SYSTEM ANALYSIS AND SIMULATION USING COMMERCIAL
SOFTWARE: Modelling Periodic Flow and Heat Transfer, Laminar Flow Convection,
6 07
Turbulent Forced Convection, Compressible Flow in Nozzle, Modelling Cavitation,
Solidification and Steady and Unsteady Flow Past a Cylinder, Flat Plate Boundary Layer.

Course outcomes: Knowledge Level

Sr. No.
By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 To have knowledge of different aspects of designing of a thermal system. L1, L3
2 To identify and examine a design problem associated to a thermal system. L4
3 To have understand basics of modeling and their associated techniques. L6
To inculcate an ability to solve engineering problems using knowledge of
4 L7
various disciplines.
To inculcate an ability to identify, formulates, and solves engineering
5 L2, L5
problems.
Top inculcate an ability to use the mathematical tools for optimization of
6 L3
engineering problems.
To design, formulate analysis and solve engineering problems using L6
7
mathematical as well as commercial software tools.
 To explain economic and exergoeconomic aspects associated with L4
8
designing and optimization of thermal system.
CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 2 1 2 - - - - - - - - 2 1
CO2 2 3 2 1 - - - - - - - - 2 1
CO3 2 2 1 3 2 1 - - - - - - 3 2
CO4 2 3 1 1 3 2 1 - - - - - 3 2
CO5 3 2 2 1 1 2 1 - - - - - 1 3
CO6 2 2 3 2 - - - - - - - - 1 3
CO7 2 2 - 3 - - - - - 1 2 3 1 3
CO8 3 2 2 3 - - - 1 1 1 - - 1 3

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
1 Design and Optimization of Thermal System, Y Jaluria, 2nd ed., CRC Press. 2020
2 Heat Transfer, Cengel and Boles, 2nd ed., McGraw Hill. 2002
Thermal Design and Optimization, A Bejan, G Satsoranis and M Moran, 2nd ed.,
3 1996
Wiley Inderscience.
Computational Fluid Dynamics, Versteeg and Malalasekhera, 1st ed., Longman
4 2007
Scientific & Technical.

Course Name : THERMAL SYSTEM MODELING AND SIMULATION

Course Code : MEM1002/MEE1034
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-1/2-2/2

Course Objectives:
To understand the significance of modelling and simulation of different engineering problems using
1
various techniques.
To understand various mathematical techniques in solution of variety of problems related to design
2
and optimization of Thermal Systems.
To understand the application of software for modelling, simulation and optimization of engineering
3
systems problems.
4 To design and analyze of industrial equipment’s and hydraulic systems.

Total No. of Lectures – 42

Lecture wise breakup No. of
Lectures
INTRODUCTION TO THERMAL DESIGN: Design, Mathematical Modelling
and Numerical Simulation of Thermal Systems, Approach to Robust Design,
1 Numerical Methods for thermal and energy systems, Closed form solutions of heat 07
transfer problems, Finite Difference and Finite Volume Formulations, TDMA
Method
DESIGN AND ANALYSIS OF THERMAL EQUIPMENT: Design Strategies,
Design of Heat Exchanger, Refrigeration System, Solar Thermal System, Heat Pump,
2 07
Cooling of Electronic Components, Energy Storage System and Design
Consideration for Engineering Material Selection.
DESIGN AND ANALYSIS OF HYDRAULIC SYSTEM: Introduction to
3 07
Hydraulic Systems, Constituents of Hydraulic System, Directional Control Valve,
 Pressure Control Valve and Flow Control Valve, Hydraulic Circuit Design and
Analysis.
OPTIMIZATION: Basic Concepts, Objective Function, Methods, Optimization of
Mechanical System and case studies, Practical Aspects in Optimal Design,
4 07
Constrained and Unconstrained Problems: Langrage Multiplier, Geometric &
Dynamic Programming based optimization.
THERMAL SYSTEM SIMULATION: Simulation of Periodic Heat Transfer,
5 Laminar and Turbulent Convection, Compressible Flow in Nozzle, Cavitation and 07
Solidification, Flow Past a Cylinder, Flat Plate Boundary Layer.
ECONOMIC AND EXERGO-ECONOMIC ANALYSIS: Estimation of Total
Capital Investment, Principal of Economic Evaluation, Calculation of Revenue
6 Requirements, Levelized Cost Rates, Cost Rate of Exergy Destruction, Exergy 07
Destruction, Percentage Relative Cost Difference, Total Operating Cost Rate and
Exergo-economic Factor.

Experiments: No. of
Turns
Thermal system modelling and simulation experiments on Heat Exchanger, refrigeration
07
system, hydraulic system, solar energy, energy storage etc. will be performed using ANSYS
Fluent /CFX, COMSOL etc.

Sr. Course outcomes: Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
1 To have knowledge of different aspects of designing of a thermal system. L1, L3
2 To identify and examine a design problem associated to a thermal system. L4
3 To integrate thermal component models and simulate a thermal system. L6
To design, formulate analysis and solve engineering problems using
4 L7
knowledge of various disciplines.
To inculcate an ability to identify, formulates, and solves engineering
5 L2, L5
problems using mathematical techniques.
To perform technoeconomic analysis of thermal system using commercial
6 L3
software techniques.
7 To communicate thermal system designs both orally and in writing. L6
To understand some of the ethical and societal issues associated with
8 L4
design and optimization of thermal system.

CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 2 1 2 - - - - - - - - 2 1
CO2 2 3 2 1 - - - - - - - - 2 1
CO3 2 2 1 3 2 1 - - - - - - 3 2
CO4 2 3 1 1 3 2 1 - - - - - 3 2
CO5 3 2 2 1 1 2 1 - - - - - 1 3
CO6 2 2 3 2 - - - - - - - - 1 3
CO7 2 2 - 3 - - - - - 1 2 3 1 3
CO8 3 2 2 3 - - - 1 1 1 - - 1 3
Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
Design and Optimization of Thermal System with MATLAB Applications, Y
1 2020
Jaluria, 3rd ed., CRC Press.
2 Heat Transfer, Cengel and Boles, 2nd ed., McGraw Hill. 2002
Thermal Design and Optimization, A Bejan, G. Satsoranis and M Moran, 2nd ed.,
3 1996
Wiley Inder science.
Computational Fluid Dynamics, Versteeg and Malalasekhera, 1sted., Longman
4 2007
Scientific & Technical.

Course Name : COMPUTATIONAL FLUID DYNAMICS

Course Code : MEE1003/MEM1014
Credits : 4
L T P : 3-0-2

Course Objectives:
1 To understand mathematical characteristics of partial differential equations.
2 To understand basic properties of computational methods.
To learn computational solution techniques for time integration of ordinary and partial differential
3
equations.
4 To learn to solve computationally the Euler and Navier-Stokes equations
To acquire basic programming and graphic skills to conduct the flow field calculations and data
5
analysis.

Total No. of Lectures – 42

Lecture wise breakup No. of Lectures
INTRODUCTION: CFD and its Applications, Numerical vs Analytical vs
Experimental approach, Modeling Vs Experimentation, Fundamental principles of
1. 4
conservation, Reynolds transport theorem, Principles of mass, momentum and energy
conservation, General scalar transport equation.
PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS AND PHYSICAL BEHAVIOUR:
Mathematical classification of Partial Differential Equation, Illustrative examples of
2. 2
elliptic, parabolic and hyperbolic equations, Applications of elliptic, parabolic and
hyperbolic partial differential equations
ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS: Error Minimization Principles,
Functional involving higher order derivatives, Approximate solution of differential
3 equations through variational formulation, Boundary conditions in the variational 3
form: Primary and secondary variables, Essential and natural boundary conditions,
Approximate solutions of differential equations.
FUNDAMENTALS OF DISCRETIZATION: Pre-processing, Solution, Post-
processing, Finite difference method (FDM), Well posed boundary value problem,
Possible types of boundary conditions, Conservativeness, Boundedness, Transportive
Ness, Finite volume method (FVM), Illustrative examples:1-D steady state heat
4 6
conduction without and with constant source term. 1-D unsteady state diffusion
problems: implicit, fully explicit and Crank-Nicholson scheme. The basic structure of
a CFD code: Pre-processor, Solver and Post-processor, User-defined-subroutines,
Solution to some basic problems in heat transfer and fluid flow.
5 FINITE VOLUME METHOD: Concepts and Illustrations through 1-D Steady 14
 State Diffusion Problems: Physical consistency, Overall balance, FV Discretization
of a 1-D steady state diffusion-based problem, Composite material with position
dependent thermal conductivity, Source term linearization, Implementation of
boundary conditions. FVM for 2-D unsteady state diffusion problems. Finite volume
discretization of convection-diffusion problem: Central difference scheme, Upwind
scheme, Exponential scheme and Hybrid scheme, Power law scheme, Generalized
convection-diffusion formulation, Finite volume discretization of two-dimensional
convection-diffusion problem, The concept of false diffusion, QUICK scheme.
Stream Function-Vorticity approach and Primitive variable approach, Staggered grid
and Collocated grid, SIMPLE Algorithm, SIMPLER Algorithm.
DISCRETIZATION OF TIME DEPENDENT DIFFUSION TYPE
PROBLEMS: Consequences of time-discretization in finite discretization,
Consistency, Stability, Convergence, LAX Equivalence theorem, Grid independent
and time independent study, Stability analysis of parabolic equations (1-D unsteady
6 state diffusion problems): Forward time central space (FTCS) scheme, Stability 7
analysis of parabolic equations (1-Dunsteady state diffusion problems): Central time
central space (CTCS) scheme (Leap frog scheme), Dufort-Frankel scheme, Stability
analysis of hyperbolic equations: FTCS, FTFS, FTBS and CTCS Schemes, Stability
analysis of 2nd order hyperbolic equations: CTCS scheme.
LINEAR ALGEBRAIC EQUATIONS: Criteria for unique solution, infinite
number of solutions and no solution, Solution techniques for systems of linear
algebraic equations: L-U decomposition technique, Tridiagonal matrix algorithm
7 6
(TDMA): Thomas algorithm, Illustrative examples, Iteration methods: Jacobi’s
method and Gauss Siedel method, Illustrative examples of Jacobi’s method and
Gauss-Siedel method, ADI (Alternating direction implicit) method.

List of Experiments No. of Turns

1 Ansys Simulation of lid driven cavity. 2
2 Ansys Simulation of heat transfer and fluid flow through pipe. 2
3 Ansys Simulation of flow past regular and irregular bodies. 2
4 Ansys Simulation of Conduction, Convection and Radiation 2
5 Ansys Simulation of flow through porous media. 3
6 Ansys Simulation of Phase Change Materials 3

Sr. Course outcomes: Knowledge Level

No. By the end of this course, the student will be able to: (Blooms Level)
Understand the use and stepwise procedure to completely solve a fluid flow
1 L1, L2
and heat transfer problem using computational methods.
Develop basic governing equations for fluid flow and heat transfer by
2 L3
examining the physical boundary conditions.
Construct and analyze the consistency, stability and convergence of various
3 discretization schemes of finite difference-based equations according to the L4, L6
nature (i.e. elliptic, parabolic and hyperbolic) of the flow problem.
Predict and implement various implicit and explicit CFD schemes to solve
4 L3, L5
steady and unsteady 1/2/3-dimensional fluid and heat transfer problems.
Analyze and evaluate various finite volume based CFD schemes to solve
5 L3, L5
fluid and heat transfer problems.
Practice CFD software to simulate practical fluid flow and heat transfer
6 L3
problems
CO-PO & PSO course Articulation Matrix
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 3 2 2 1 - - - - - - 1 3 2
CO2 2 3 3 2 1 - - - - - - 1 2 3
CO3 2 2 3 2 1 - - - - - - 1 2 3
CO4 2 2 3 3 2 - - - - - - 1 2 2
CO5 2 2 3 3 2 - - - - - - 1 2 2
CO6 2 2 2 2 3 - - - - 3 - 2 2 3

Suggested Books:
Year of
Sr.
Name of Book/ Authors/ Publisher Publication/
No.
Reprint
1 Numerical Heat Transfer and Fluid Flow, S. V. Patankar, McGraw-Hill. 2018
2 Computational Fluid Dynamics, T. J. Chung, Cambridge University Press. 2010
An Introduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics, H. K. Versteeg & W. 2007
3
Malalasekera, 2nded. Longman Scientific &Technical
Computational Methods for Fluid Dynamics, J. H. Ferziger and M. Peric, 3 rd ed. 2002
4
Springer
Computational Fluid Mechanics and Heat Transfer, John C. Tannehill, Dale A. 2016
5
Anderson and Richard H. Pletcher, 3rd ed., Taylor & Francis
6 Computational Fluid Dynamics, John D. Anderson Jr, McGraw Hill Book Company 2017
Computational Fluid Dynamics: Principles and Applications, J. Blazek, 3rd ed. 2015
7
Elsevier.